summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2010-06-18 16:19:17 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2010-06-18 16:19:17 +0000
commit2c714215c31a63d9e9b11ad3c57cf8ee3a1e5258 (patch)
tree8b40b3ce151d1c7468cb8281177d599c12ed4fd3 /Master
parent13f006e3f54d8837fdd9933bbf513c569d011e05 (diff)
dtk 2009/11/07 v1.20 (17jun10)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@19040 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/dtk/beispiel.bib80
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/README83
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.ltx41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.tex257
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.pdfbin0 -> 243393 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.tex116
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk00.clo81
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk01.clo (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk07.clo)8
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk02.clo81
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk03.clo80
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk05.clo153
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk06.clo160
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk95.clo182
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk96.clo109
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk97.clo94
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk98.clo94
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk99.clo93
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/textlist.sty14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile142
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile.in93
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/adressen.tex70
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/editorial.tex37
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/grusswort.tex15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/impressum.tex93
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/komoedie.tex155
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/ruecken.tex29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/rueckenNeu.tex29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/stammtische.tex281
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/termine.tex89
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist6
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.dtx4618
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.ins91
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.clo162
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls199
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.sty1140
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk10.clo18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty72
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check2
-rwxr-xr-xMaster/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds2
41 files changed, 2644 insertions, 6460 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/dtk/beispiel.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/dtk/beispiel.bib
deleted file mode 100644
index f5eb82fae21..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/dtk/beispiel.bib
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%% $Id: beispiel.bib,v 1.1 2000/08/06 11:18:33 gene Exp $
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-@Book{ companion,
- author = {Michel Goosens and Frank Mittelbach and Alexander
- Samarin},
- title = {The {\LaTeX} Companion},
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company},
- year = {1994},
- address = {Reading, Mass.}
-}
-
-@Book{ knuth:mfbook,
- author = {Donald E. Knuth},
- title = {The {\MF book}},
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company},
- year = 1990,
- address = {Reading, Mass.},
- edition = 5,
- volume = {C},
- series = {Computers and Typesetting}
-}
-
-@Book{ knuth:texbook,
- author = {Donald E. Knuth},
- title = {The {\TeX book}},
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company},
- address = {Reading, Mass.},
- year = 1989,
- edition = {15},
- volume = {A},
- series = {Computers and Typesetting}
-}
-
-@Book{ kopka:latex,
- author = {Helmut Kopka},
- title = {{\LaTeX} -- Eine Einf{\"u}hrung},
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company},
- address = {Bonn},
- year = 1993
-}
-
-@Book{ kopka:latex2,
- author = {Helmut Kopka},
- title = {{\LaTeX}-Erg{\"a}nzungen -- mit einer Einf{\"u}hrung in
- {\MF}},
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company},
- address = {Bonn},
- year = 1995
-}
-
-@Book{ lamport:latex.2,
- author = {Leslie Lamport},
- title = {{\LaTeX}: A Document Preparation System},
- publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company},
- year = {1994},
- address = {Reading, Mass.},
- edition = {2}
-}
-
-@Article{ neugebauer:klasse,
- author = {Gerd Neugebauer},
- title = {Eine Klasse f{\"u}r {\glqq}Die {\TeX}nische
- Kom{\"o}die{\grqq}},
- journal = dtk,
- year = 1995,
- volume = {3/95},
- pages = {6-14}
-}
-
-@Misc{ twg:tds,
- author = {TUG Working Group on a \TeX{} Directory Structure},
- title = {A Directory Structure for {\TeX} Files},
- howpublished = {Draft version 0.9991},
- year = 1996,
- month = nov,
- note = {CTAN:
- \texttt{tex-archive/""tds/""working-paper/""tds-0.9991.tar.gz}}
-}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/README
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ca6ba3e1c6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/README
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
-
- dtk: A Document Class and Style for
- ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''
- the journal of the german speaking TeX users group
-
- original written by
- Gerd Neugebauer
- gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
-
-
-dtk is a document class and style file which has been written to be
-used for the communications of the German speaking TeX users group
-Dante e.V.: ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
-
-For changes from the previous versions see the end of this file.
-
-The distribution consists of the following files (if one is missing
-then complain at the distributor of your version):
-
-dtk.dtx
- This is the main distribution file. It contains the class and
- style file. LaTeXing this file produces the English documentation.
-dtk.ins
- This is the driver file for the extraction procedure. You need
- the doc utility to unpack it.
-dtk.bst
- This is the BibTeX style file to be used for ``Die TeXnische
- Komoedie''.
-ReadMe
- This file.
-beipiel.tex
- A short description example for dtk (in German).
-beispiel.ltx
- The driver file for beispiel.tex. Run this file through LaTeX to
- get the dvi file.
-beispiel.bib
- The bibliography for beispiel.tex.
-
-
-INSTALLATION
-------------
-
-(0) If you have obtained the unpacked distribution, i.e. you
- already have cls and clo files, then continue with step (2).
-
-(1) Run TeX or LaTeX on dtk.ins.
-
- This should produce the files dtk.cls, dtk.sty, dtklogos.sty,
- dtk.ist, and some dtk*.clo files.
-
- This might fail due to several reasons. In this case revert to
- the unpacked files which are also distributed at the same
- place where you got the sources from.
-
-(2) Move dtk.cls and the dtk*.clo files to a place where LaTeX
- searches for class files. Move dtk.sty to a place where LaTeX
- searches for style files.
-
- The suggested place for the LaTeX files in a TDS conform
- installation is the directory
-
- TEXMF/tex/latex/supported/dtk
-
- where TEXMF is the root of the TDS installation tree.
-
-(3) Run LaTeX on dtk.dtx to produce the documentation. LaTeX2e
- is required for this step.
-
- Usually the documentation contains a general part describing
- the use of the class/style and the description of the
- implementation details. If you want to omit the implementation
- description you can create the file dtk.dcf before compiling
- the documentation. This file should contain the following
- lines:
-
- \OnlyDescription
- \endinput
-
-(4) Run LaTeX, BibTeX, and LaTeX twice again on beispiel.ltx for a
- short description and a sample in German.
-
-
-y \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.ltx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.ltx
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ecd76659fa..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.ltx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-\documentclass[07]{dtk}% load class options 07
-%%
-%% Packete/Style-Optionen und anderes Material in der Pr"aambel:
-%%
-\usepackage{booktabs}
-%%
-%% Das Packet german/ngerman wird automatisch geladen und sollte nicht
-%% explizit angefordert werden.
-%%
-%% Regel: Es sollten so wenig wie m"oglich zus"atzliche Packete
-%% angefordert werden, da diese mit anderen Packeten in Konflikt
-%% geraten k"onnten, die in anderen Artikeln unbedingt
-%% ben"otigt werden.
-%% Regel: Es sollten nicht unn"otig viele Kommandos oder Umgebungen
-%% definiert werden (aus demselben Grund). N"otigenfalls
-%% sollte die Definition im Artikel und nicht in der Pr"aambel
-%% geschehen.
-%% Regel: Bei der Produktion der Zeitschrift wird normalerweise das
-%% Input-Encoding utf8 verwendet, sofern nicht ein Beitrag
-%% unbedingt etwas anderes erforderlich macht.
-%% Es darf kein ein anderes Input-Encoding verwendet werden, wenn
-%% wie unten gezeigt eine lokale Umschaltung erfolgt.
-%%
-\begin{document}
-%
-% Nun wird nur noch der eigentliche Beitrag geladen. Alles weitere
-% findet in der Datei beispiel.tex statt.
-%
-%% Die Vereinszeitschrift wird mit dem Input-Encoding
-%% utf8 gesetzt. Wenn man eine andere Kodierung bevorzugt,
-%% dann den Textteil in
-%% \bgroup
-%% \inputencoding{...}
-%% \input{beispiel}
-%% \egroup
-%%
-\input{beispiel}
-%
-%
-\end{document}
-%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 49409222b7b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,257 +0,0 @@
-%%*****************************************************************************
-%% $Id: beispiel.tex,v 1.4 2001/10/21 15:17:13 gene Exp $
-%%*****************************************************************************
-%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% Dies ist ein Beispieldokument zu einem Artikel für "`Die TeXnische
-%% Kom"odie"'. Dieses soll die Struktur aufzeigen, die solch ein Artikel
-%% haben sollte. Au"serdem sind hier die speziellen Makros im Einsatz
-%% zu sehen und es werden einige Regeln vermittelt, die es zu beachten
-%% gilt.
-%%
-%% Diese Datei enthält nur den eigentlichen Artikel. Diese Datei kann
-%% nicht alleine von LaTeX bearbeitet werden. Hierzu ist der Treiber
-%% in der Datei beispiel.ltx notwendig. Die Übersetzung des Beitrags
-%% geschieht mit
-%%
-%% latex beispiel.ltx
-%%
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% Das Paket german/ngerman wird automatisch geladen und sollte nicht
-%% explizit angefordert werden.
-%%
-%% Regel: Es sollten so wenig wie m"oglich zus"atzliche Pakete
-%% angefordert werden, da diese mit anderen Paketen in Konflikt
-%% geraten k"onnten, die in anderen Artikeln unbedingt
-%% ben"otigt werden.
-%% Regel: Es sollten nicht unn"otig viele Kommandos oder Umgebungen
-%% definiert werden (aus demselben Grund). N"otigenfalls
-%% sollte die Definition im Artikel und nicht in der Pr"aambel
-%% geschehen.
-%% Regel: Es darf kein spezielles inputencoding verwendet werden. Die
-%% Eingabe muss reines ASCII sein.
-%% Bei Bedarf kann als letzter Schritt die Umwandlung der
-%% Sonderzeichen in pures ASCII erfolgen (z.B. mit recode)
-%%
-
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%% Angabe des Titels der Arbeit.
-\title{Der Titel, der auch so lang sein kann, dass er nicht mehr in die
- Kopfzeile passt}
-
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%% Angabe der Autoren. Mehrere Autoren sind durch \and getrennt.
-%% Die Vornamen m"oglichst nicht abk"urzen.
-\author{A. Utor\and J.E. Mand}
-
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%% Angabe der Adressen der Autoren. Jeder Autor ist mit einer eigenen
-%% \address-Anweisung vertreten.
-%% Das erste Argument enth"alt (Titel und) Vornamen.
-%% Das zweite Argument enth"alt die restlichen Namensbestandteile
-%% (hiernach wird sortiert).
-%% Das dritte Argument enth"at die Adresse. Die Bestandteile der
-%% Adresse sind durch \\ voneinander getrennt.
-\address{A.}{Utor}{Eine Stra"se 11\\11111 Irgendwo}
-\address{J.E.}{Mand}{Weiter Weg 22\\99999 Hinterm Berg}
-
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%% Hier wird der Titel gesetzt.
-\maketitle
-
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%% Die Definition von lokalen Makros und Umgebungen erfolgt hier.
-\newcommand{\bs}{\symbol{`\\}}
-
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%% Falls der Titel sehr lang ist, muss hier eine kurze Fassung f"ur die
-%% Kopfzeile angegeben werden. Ansonsten kann diese Anweisung wegfallen.
-\markboth{Der Kurztitel}{Der Kurztitel}
-
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-\begin{abstract}
- Der Abstract enth"alt eine kurze Zusammenfassung der Problemstellung,
- die in dem Artikel behandelt wird. Hier soll der Leser einen Hinweis
- bekommen, ob der Artikel interessant ist, oder erst sp"ater gelesen
- werden kann.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\section{Einleitung}
-
-In der Einleitung sollte das Problem motiviert werden, das in diesem
-Artikel behandelt wird. Wir behandeln hier das Vorbereiten von
-Artikeln f"ur \DTK. Normalerweise wird das etwas l"anger ausfallen.
-
-\section{Jetzt geht's los}
-
-Es k"onnen alle \LaTeX-Konstrukte verwendet werden, die im
-\texttt{article}-Style definiert sind. Dabei sind allerdings einige
-Einschr"ankungen zu beachten.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Die Abschnitte sind nicht nummeriert. Deshalb macht es keinen
- Unterschied, ob \verb|\section| oder \verb|\section*| verwendet
- wird. Der Einfachheit halber sollte deshalb \verb|\section| benutzt
- werden. Analoges gilt f"ur Unterabschnitte etc.
-\item Die Papiergr"o"se ist DIN A5. Das muss ber"ucksichtigt werden, wenn
- Figuren oder Tabellen entworfen werden.
-\item Es d"urfen keine globalen Parameter umdefiniert werden, da dies
- andere Artikel st"oren k"onnte. Insbesondere ist die Schriftgr"o"se
- festgelegt.
-\item Es sollten keine Randnotizen (\verb|\marginpar|) benutzt werden
- (Es ist einfach kein ausreichender Rand vorhanden).
-\end{itemize}
-
-Die Makros in der Tabelle~\ref{tab:logos} stehen zus"atzlich zur
-Verf"ugung und sollten an den entsprechenden Stellen auch benutzt
-werden.
-\begin{table}[t]
- \begin{center}
- \caption{Logos in dtk.cls}\label{tab:logos}
-
- \begin{tabular}{ll}\toprule
- \emph{Marko} & \emph{Ergebnis}\\\midrule
- \texttt{\bs AMSLaTeX} & \AMSLaTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs AMSTeX} & \AMSTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs AMS} & \AMS \\
- \texttt{\bs BibTeX} & \BibTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs dante} & \dante \\
- \texttt{\bs Dante} & \Dante \\
- \texttt{\bs DTK} & \DTK \\
- \texttt{\bs emTeX} & \emTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs eTeX} & \eTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs LAmSTeX} & \LAmSTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs LaTeXTeX} & \LaTeXTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs LaTeXe} & \LaTeXe \\
- \texttt{\bs MF} & \MF \\
- \texttt{\bs MP} & \MP \\
- \texttt{\bs MakeIndex} & \MakeIndex \\
- \texttt{\bs NTS} & \NTS \\
- \texttt{\bs PS} & \PS \\
- \texttt{\bs PiCTeX} & \PiCTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs PubliCTeX} & \PubliCTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs SliTeX} & \SliTeX \\
- \texttt{\bs TeXXeT} & \TeXXeT \\
- \texttt{\bs TeXeT} & \TeXeT \\\bottomrule
- \end{tabular}
- \end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-Beim Setzen von Verzeichnisnamen, E-Mail-Adressen, URLs und "ahnlichem
-tritt oft das Problem auf, dass diese nicht getrennt werden k"onnen,
-wenn sie in \verb|\texttt| gesetzt sind. Zu diesem Zweck wurde von
-dieser Klasse das Makro \verb|\Path| bereitgestellt, das sein Argument
-in der Nichtproportionalschrift setzt und die Trennung an gewissen
-Stellen erlaubt. Damit ist es dann m"oglich, auch lange URLs wie die
-folgende zu setzen:
-\Path{http://www.gerd-neugebauer.de/software/TeX/}.
-
-Bei dieser Gelegenheit sind die Tilde \verb|~| und der Unterstrich
-\verb|_| keine aktiven Zeichen mehr und k"onnen damit direkt
-eingegeben werden.
-
-Leider ist \verb|\Path| fragil. Das hei"st, dass es in Argumenten von
-anderen Makros unerwartete Resultate liefern kann und somit dort nicht
-gebraucht werden sollte.
-
-
-\section{Tabellen}
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Tabellen sollten normalerweise als Floats ausgef"uhrt werden.
- Damit ist es f"ur \LaTeX{} m"oglich, einen geeigneten Ort f"ur deren
- Plazierung zu finden. In der Regel sollte als Plazierungsargument
- \verb|[tp]| angegeben werden.
-\item Tabellen sollten eine Unterschrift (\verb|\caption|) tragen und
- "uber eine Referenz im laufenden Text verankert werden.
-\item Auf "uberfl"ussigen Schmuck, wie Rahmen und Linien sollte
- verzichtet werden. Meistens kann man "uber angemessene Formatierung
- bessere Ergebnisse erreichen als durch zus"atzliche Linien.
-\item Die mit \verb|\label| vergebenen Namen sind lokal f"ur jeden
- Artikel. Hier braucht keine R"ucksicht auf andere Artikel genommen zu
- werden.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Ein Beispiel ist in der Tabelle~\ref{tab:logos} zu sehen.
-
-
-\section{Goldene Regeln}
-
-In diesem Abschnitt werden Regeln f"ur den Satz deutscher Texte
-gesammelt. Diese sind von allgemeinerem Interesse. Die Erfahrung hat
-gezeigt, dass diese Regeln trotzdem nicht allgemein bekannt sind, oder
-angewendet werden.
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Es gilt die deutsche Rechtschreibung, wie sie im Duden
- festgelegt ist! Seit der Ausgabe 1/2000 wird die 21. Auf\/lage des
- Duden zu Grunde gelegt.
-\item Die Satzzeichen Punkt, Komma, Semikolon, Ausrufezeichen und
- Fragezeichen folgen ohne Zwischenraum auf das davorstehende Wort.
-\item Bei Abk"urzungen folgt nach einem inneren Punkt ein kleiner
- Zwischenraum:
- z.\,B. wird als \verb|z.\,B.| eingegeben.
-
- Am Anfang eines Satzes werden Abk"urzungen ausgeschrieben. Im
- Allgemeinen ist es ratsam, Abkürzungen nur sehr sparsam einzusetzen.
- So kann man "`z.\,B."' immer durch "`beispielsweise"' ersetzen.
-\item Hervorhebungen erfolgen mit \verb|\emph|. \verb|\textbf| ist f"ur
- Hervorhebungen \emph{nicht}\/ zu\-l"assig!
-\item Die Gedankenstriche -- werden als \verb|--| eingegeben. Davor
- und danach ist ein Leerraum zu lassen.
-\item Ein Bereich von Zahlen wird mit \verb|--| gebildet. Hierbei sind
- davor und danach \emph{keine}\/ Leerzeichen einzuf"ugen:
- 21--34
-\item Bindestriche zwischen Worten werden mit \verb|-| eingegeben.
- Davor und danach sind keine Leerzeichen zul"assig.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-
-\section{Literatur}
-
-Literatur sollte mit \BibTeX{} verwaltet werden.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item Es git einen speziellen \BibTeX-Style \texttt{dtk.bst}, der mit
- der Klasse \verb|dtk.cls| verteilt wird. Dieser sollte verwendet
- werden.
-\item Die Literatur muss in einer \BibTeX-Datei gesammelt sein. Diese
- muss denselben Basisnamen haben wie das eigentliche Dokument.
-\item Alternativ kann die Literatur in dem Dokument direkt angegeben
- werden. In diesem Fall k"onnen die Beipiele am Ende dieses Dokuments
- oder in der Zeitschrift "`\DTK"' "ur das Aussehen dienen. Davon wird
- allerdings dringend abgeraten.
-\end{itemize}
-
-An dieser Stelle kommen einige Beispiele f"ur Literaturzitate. Eine
-Kurzbeschreibung der Klasse und deren Entstehung wurde in
-\cite{neugebauer:klasse} ver"offentlicht.
-
-Angefangen hat alles mit einigen B"uchern von Donald Knuth
-\cite{knuth:texbook,knuth:mfbook}. Der Klassiker zu \LaTeX{} stammt
-von Leslie Lamport \cite{lamport:latex.2}. Neuerdings gibt es den
-"`Companion"' \cite{companion}. Schlie"slich sollen auch noch B"ucher auf
-Deutsch nicht verschwiegen werden \cite{kopka:latex,kopka:latex2}.
-
-Schlie"slich muss auch noch die \TeX-Directory-Structure
-\cite{twg:tds} erw"ahnt werden, da das ein Beipiel f"ur eine Referenz
-ins CTAN enth"alt.
-
-
-\section{Zusammenfassung}
-
-Hier sollte noch einmal ein Resum\'e gezogen werden. Auch ein Ausblick
-oder eine Diskussion von offenen Problemen kann hier erfolgen.
-
-Eine letzte Bitte sei hier noch angebracht. Das Dokument, das zur
-Ver"offentlichung f"ur "`\DTK"' eingereicht wird, sollte m"oglichst
-ohne Fehler durch \LaTeX{} bearbeitet werden k"onnen. Dazu z"ahlen
-auch "`l"a"sliche S"unden"' wie overfull/underfull Boxes.
-
-\bibliography{beispiel}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..59465c7e2b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+@Book{voss:2008,
+ author = {Herbert Vo{\ss}},
+ title = {{PSTricks} -- {G}rafik f\"ur {\TeX} und {\LaTeX}},
+ edition = {5.},
+ publisher = {DANTE -- Lob.media},
+ year = {2008},
+ address = {Heidelberg/""Hamburg}
+}
+
+@Manual{pakin:2008,
+ Title = {The Comprehensive {\LaTeX} Symbol list},
+ Author = {Pakin, Scott},
+ Organization = {CTAN},
+ annote = {\ctanurl{/info/symbols/comprehensive/symbol-a4.pdf}},
+ Note = {},
+ year = {2008},
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0fec23d476d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4d71fe3d9d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+\documentclass[10,ngerman]{dtk}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+%\usepackage[latin9]{inputenc}
+
+\begin{document}
+\title{Die \texttt{dtk}-Klasse, \small Version \DTKversion -- \DTKdate}
+\author{Rolf Niepraschk\and Herbert Voß}
+\address{Herbert}{Voß}
+ {Wasgenstraße~21\\
+ 14129 Berlin\\
+ \protect\url{herbert@dante.de}}
+\address{Rolf}{Niepraschk}%
+ {Persiusstr.~12\\
+ 10245~Berlin\\
+ \protect\url{Rolf.Niepraschk@gmx.de}}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Makros}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\providecommand\File[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\providecommand\Package[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\providecommand\Program[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\providecommand\Command[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\providecommand\Macro[1]{\texttt{\#1}}
+\providecommand\Environment[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\let\Email\url
+\providecommand\Acronym[1]{\textsc{#1}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Die Dateien \File{dtk.clo} und \File{10.clo} beinhalten die Klassenoptionen und
+werden nur fortgeschreiben, wenn etwas Neues einzufügen ist. Das Paket
+\Package{dtk} sollte nur um wichtige Pakete ergänzt werden, die für den Inhalt
+des Manuskripts wichtig sind. Das Programm \Program{pdflatex} sollte bevorzugt
+zum Übersetzen eingesetzt werden. Macros wie \Macro{texttt} müssen nicht mit
+dem Backslash angegeben werden, der wird automatisch gesetzt. Es folgen
+Beispiele mit Listings in nummerierter und in nichtnummerierter Art:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=DTKlstNumber]
+\begin{itemize}
+\item ...
+\end{itemize}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=DTKlstNoNumber]
+\begin{description}
+\item ...
+\end{description}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\Acronym{Ubuntu} wird als Akronym gesetzt.
+Weitere Informationen für Autoren findet man im DTK-Wiki:
+\url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/WebHome}.
+
+Zm Schluss folgt der Quelltext dieses Beispieldokumentes:
+\lstinputlisting[style=DTKlstNumber,language={[AlLaTeX]{TeX}}]{\jobname.tex}
+
+\section{Listen}
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Bei \Environment{itemize} werden
+die Elemente durch Punkte und andere Symbole gekennzeichnet.
+\item Listen kann man auch verschachteln:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Die maximale Schachtelungstiefe ist~4.~\cite{voss:2008}
+ \item
+ Bezeichnung und Ein\-rückung der Elemente
+ wechseln automatisch.
+ \end{itemize}
+\item usw.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Bei \Environment{enumerate} werden
+die Elemente mit Ziffern oder Buchstaben numeriert.
+\item Die Numerierung erfolgt automatisch.~\cite{pakin:2008}
+\item Listen kann man auch
+verschachteln:
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Die maximale Schachtelungstiefe
+ ist~4.
+ \item Bezeichnung und Ein\-rückung der Elemente
+ wechseln automatisch.
+ \end{enumerate}
+\item usw.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[Gelse:]
+ ein kleines Tier, das
+ östlich des Semmering Touristen verjagt.
+\item[Gemse:]
+ ein großes Tier, das
+ westlich des Semmering von Touristen verjagt wird.
+\item[G"urteltier:]
+ ein mittelgroßes Tier, das
+ hier nur wegen der Länge seines Namens vorkommt.
+\end{description}
+
+\section{Bibliografie}
+Die folgende Bibliografie hat nur einen
+Demonstrationscharakter.
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=DTKlstNumber]
+\begingroup
+\RaggedRight
+\bibliography{\jobname}
+\endgroup
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+
+\begingroup
+\RaggedRight
+\bibliography{\jobname}
+\endgroup
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk00.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk00.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f74b397e28a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk00.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk00.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2000')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk00.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\emergencystretch = 0pt
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk00.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk07.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk01.clo
index 2b86288d557..bde8cecf9d3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk07.clo
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk01.clo
@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
%%
-%% This is file `dtk07.clo',
+%% This is file `dtk01.clo',
%% generated with the docstrip utility.
%%
%% The original source files were:
%%
-%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2006|2007')
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2001')
%%
%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
%%
%% For the copyright see the source file.
%%
%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
-%% with new filenames distinct from dtk07.clo.
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk01.clo.
%%
%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
@@ -77,4 +77,4 @@
%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\endinput
%%
-%% End of file `dtk07.clo'.
+%% End of file `dtk01.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk02.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk02.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..730b3b8f3af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk02.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk02.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2002')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk02.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newcommand\DTK@bibliography@rightskip{}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk02.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk03.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk03.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..308c03daa46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk03.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk03.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2003')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk03.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk03.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk05.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk05.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b0ffd03612c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk05.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk05.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2005')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk05.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+\ProvidesFile{dtk05.clo}
+ [2006/08/11 v0.1 dtk class option (RN)]
+
+\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{%
+ \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
+ %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5}
+ %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{lmr12 scaled 2938}
+ \DeclareFixedFont\CoverTitleFont{\encodingdefault}%
+ {\rmdefault}{m}{n}{41.26}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined
+ %\newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986}
+ \DeclareFixedFont\CoverNumberFont{\encodingdefault}%
+ {\rmdefault}{m}{n}{51.66}%
+ \fi
+ \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill
+ \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont
+ \journalname\hfill\null}%
+ \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa
+ \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa
+ \hbox to\@tempdimb{%
+ \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{%
+ \vskip\wd\@tempboxa
+ \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \
+ \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight}
+ \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright
+ \rule{1em}{0pt}%
+ \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em
+ \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font
+ {\Huge\DANTE}\\
+ Deutschsprachige\\
+ Anwendervereinigung
+ \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex]
+ \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap
+ \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}%
+ \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}%
+ {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+ \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}%
+ \CoverNumberFont
+ \null\hfill
+ \makebox(0,0)[br]{%
+ \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{%
+ \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}%
+ }}% Warum verwendet `\CoverArt@strip@no' \CoverTitleFont? RN
+ \end{minipage}%
+}
+
+\@tempswafalse
+\@ifpackageloaded{ngerman}{\@tempswatrue}{}%
+\@ifpackageloaded{german}{\@tempswatrue}{}%
+\if@tempswa
+ \def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq}%
+ \def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq}%
+\else
+ \@ifpackageloaded{babel}%
+ {%
+ \declare@shorthand{german}{"`}{\frqq}%
+ \declare@shorthand{german}{"'}{\flqq}%
+ }{}%
+\fi
+\RequirePackage{showexpl}
+\lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX}
+\providecommand\lstverb{%
+ \leavevmode\bgroup %
+ \def\lst@boxpos{b}%
+ \lsthk@PreSet\lstset{flexiblecolumns,basicstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize,backgroundcolor={},
+ breaklines=false,keywordstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize}%
+ \lsthk@TextStyle
+ \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\afterassignment\lst@InlineG \let\@let@token}%
+ \lstinline@}
+
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk05.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk06.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk06.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..56dfabf9ea8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk06.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk06.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2006')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk05.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2005-03-23 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.8 2002/04/10 21:03:42 gene Exp gene $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2005 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+\ProvidesFile{dtk06.clo}
+ [2007/04/20 v0.01 dtk class option (hv)]
+
+\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{%
+ \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
+ %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5}
+ %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{lmr12 scaled 2938}
+ \DeclareFixedFont\CoverTitleFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{41.26}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined
+ %\newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986}
+ \DeclareFixedFont\CoverNumberFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{51.66}%
+ \fi
+\iffalse
+ \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill
+ \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont
+ \fontsize{41.26}{42}\selectfont\journalname\hfill\null}%
+ \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa
+ \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa
+ \hbox to\@tempdimb{\kern-20pt%
+ \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{%
+ \vskip\wd\@tempboxa
+ \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \
+ \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight}
+\fi
+ \newsavebox\dtk@titlebox
+ \sbox\dtk@titlebox{\parbox{\textheight}{%
+ \null\hfill\CoverTitleFont\fontsize{41.26}{42}\selectfont\journalname\hfill\null}}
+ \hspace*{5pt}
+ \rotatebox{90}{\usebox\dtk@titlebox}\
+ \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight}
+ \hfill
+%
+ \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright
+ \rule{1em}{0pt}%
+ \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em
+ \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font
+ {\Huge\DANTE}\\
+ Deutschsprachige\\
+ Anwendervereinigung
+ \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex]
+ \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap
+ \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}%
+ \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}%
+ {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+ \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}%
+ \CoverNumberFont
+ \null\hfill
+ \makebox(0,0)[br]{%
+ \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{%
+ \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}%
+ }}% Warum verwendet `\CoverArt@strip@no' \CoverTitleFont? RN
+ \end{minipage}%
+}
+
+%\PassOptionsToPackage{ngerman}{babel}
+\RequirePackage{babel}
+\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\frqq}%
+\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\flqq}%
+%\def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq}
+%\def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq}
+
+
+\RequirePackage{showexpl}
+\lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX}
+\providecommand\lstverb{%
+ \leavevmode\bgroup %
+ \def\lst@boxpos{b}%
+ \lsthk@PreSet\lstset{flexiblecolumns,basicstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize,backgroundcolor={},
+ breaklines=false,keywordstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize}%
+ \lsthk@TextStyle
+ \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\afterassignment\lst@InlineG \let\@let@token}%
+ \lstinline@}
+\providecommand*{\ctanurl}[1]{\url{CTAN: #1}}
+
+
+\endinput
+
+
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk05.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk95.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk95.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..36c32a1afa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk95.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,182 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk95.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1995')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk95.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc}
+\textheight = 484pt
+\textwidth = 342pt
+\headheight = 14pt
+\headsep = 12pt
+\footskip = 21pt
+\columnsep = 10pt
+\emergencystretch = 0pt
+\renewcommand\DTKgerman{
+ \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman
+ \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman
+ \selectlanguage{german}%
+}
+\ifDTK@german@
+ \DTKgerman
+\fi
+\renewcommand\ChapterFont{\Large\bf}
+\renewcommand\SectionFont{\normalsize\bf}
+\renewcommand\SubsectionFont{\normalsize\it}
+\renewcommand\SubsubsectionFont{\normalsize\it}
+\renewcommand\AuthorFont{\normalsize\rm}
+\renewcommand\TitleFont{\large\bf}
+\renewcommand\HeadFont{\sl}
+\renewcommand\FootFont{\footnotesize\sl}
+\renewcommand\PagenoFont{\rm}
+\renewcommand\HeadRuleDepth{0.1pt}
+\renewcommand\FootRuleDepth{0.1pt}
+\renewcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\bullet$}
+\renewcommand\labelitemii{\bf --}
+\renewcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\ast$}
+\setlength\leftmargini{2.5em}
+\setlength\leftmarginii{2.2em}
+\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.87em}
+\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.7em}
+\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1}
+\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
+ \list{}{\listparindent 1.5em
+ \itemindent\listparindent
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin\parsep \z@ plus\p@}%
+ \item\relax
+}{\endlist}
+\renewcommand\TopArt[2]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \unitlength = 1pt
+ \@tempcnta = \textwidth
+ \divide\@tempcnta by \unitlength
+ \framebox(\@tempcnta,38){\parbox{.95\textwidth}{%
+ \begin{center}{\large\bf #1}#2 \end{center}}}
+ \endgroup}
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{%
+ -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{%
+ -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{%
+ -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{%
+ 1ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}%
+ {\parindent}{1ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\DTKtitle@skip{0pt}
+\renewcommand\DTKtitle@sep{\rule{\textwidth}{.4pt}%
+ \vskip 14pt plus 8pt minus 12pt}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\noindent
+ \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$}#1}
+\renewcommand\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@
+ \hrule width .4\columnwidth
+ \kern 2.6\p@}
+\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{
+ \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
+ \newfont\CoverTitleFont{cmr17 scaled \magstep 5}%
+ \fi
+ \begin{center}
+ {\LARGE DANTE\\[14pt]
+ \Large Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ \eV}%
+ \\\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\par\vfill
+ \CoverTitleFont Die
+ \\[22pt] \TeX nische
+ \\[22pt] Kom{\"o}die
+ \par\vfill\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\\[4pt]\large
+ Heft #1\hfill #2.\ Jahrgang\hfill #3
+ \normalsize
+ \end{center}\vspace*{28.5pt}}
+\let\addresssize\relax
+\ifDTK@Author@\else
+ \renewcommand\ContentsArt{\part@nosubtitle{\contentsname}}
+\fi
+\renewcommand\l@part[2]{%
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line
+ \@tempdima 1.5em
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \bf
+ \leavevmode
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup}
+\renewcommand\l@chapter{\@dottedtocline{0}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+ \renewcommand\eV{e.\kern-.18emV\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk95.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk96.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk96.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3c8f1429ef9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk96.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk96.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1996')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk96.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc}
+\textheight = 484pt
+\textwidth = 342pt
+\columnsep = 10pt
+\emergencystretch = 0pt
+\renewcommand\DTKgerman{
+ \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman
+ \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman
+ \selectlanguage{german}%
+}
+\ifDTK@german@
+ \DTKgerman
+\fi
+\let\addresssize\relax
+\renewcommand\l@part[2]{%
+ \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line
+ \@tempdima 1.5em
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
+ \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
+ \bf
+ \leavevmode
+ \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
+ \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty
+ \endgroup}
+\renewcommand\l@chapter{\@dottedtocline{0}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk96.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk97.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk97.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..439e5a7c80a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk97.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk97.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1997')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk97.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc}
+\textheight = 484pt
+\textwidth = 342pt
+\columnsep = 10pt
+\emergencystretch = 0pt
+\renewcommand\DTKgerman{
+ \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman
+ \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman
+ \selectlanguage{german}%
+}
+\ifDTK@german@
+ \DTKgerman
+\fi
+\def\TOC@configure{\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{bdx}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk97.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk98.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk98.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..63199c36ba3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk98.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk98.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1998')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk98.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc}
+\textheight = 484pt
+\textwidth = 342pt
+\columnsep = 10pt
+\emergencystretch = 0pt
+\renewcommand\DTKgerman{
+ \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman
+ \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman
+ \selectlanguage{german}%
+}
+\ifDTK@german@
+ \DTKgerman
+\fi
+\def\TOC@configure{\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{bdx}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk98.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk99.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk99.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7b4eea7e952
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk99.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `dtk99.clo',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1999')
+%%
+%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+%%
+%% For the copyright see the source file.
+%%
+%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
+%% with new filenames distinct from dtk99.clo.
+%%
+%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
+%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
+%%
+%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
+%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
+%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
+%% in the same archive or directory.)
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% Purpose:
+%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
+%%
+%% Documentation:
+%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
+%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
+%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
+%%
+%%
+%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Mainzer Str. 8
+%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
+%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
+%%
+%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
+%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
+%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
+%% he says so in writing.
+%%
+%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
+%% modifications are indicated.
+%%
+%%
+%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
+%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
+%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%%
+%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\textheight = 484pt
+\textwidth = 342pt
+\columnsep = 10pt
+\emergencystretch = 0pt
+\renewcommand\DTKgerman{
+ \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman
+ \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman
+ \selectlanguage{german}%
+}
+\ifDTK@german@
+ \DTKgerman
+\fi
+\def\TOC@configure{\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{bdx}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `dtk99.clo'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/textlist.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/textlist.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5417fa577b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/textlist.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+% Unbekannter Style/Paket ``textlist''
+% nachgebaut analog zu ``deflist.sty''
+% (br, 12.02.2001)
+\newenvironment{textlist}[1]{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+ \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
+ \def\makelabel##1{##1\hfill}%
+ }%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}
+\endinput \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4380c879502
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+
+# Rolf Niepraschk, 2005/02/20, Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de
+#
+# `Makefile' für "Die TeXnische Komödie", Heft 2/2005
+
+MAIN = komoedie
+
+ARCHNAME = $(MAIN)-03-09-$(shell date +%y%m%d)
+
+LATEX = pdflatex
+#LATEX = xelatex
+
+MAKEINDEXSTYLE = dtk-idx.ist
+MAKEGLOSSARYSTYLE = dtk-adr.ist
+
+ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),corr)
+ DOCUMENTOPT = '\\PassOptionsToClass{draft}{dtk}'
+endif
+
+# Alle kompletten Artikel mit Literaturverzeichnis
+# (Namen der Hauptdateien mit \documentclass usw.).
+ARTICLES_BIB = ziegenhagen.ltx
+
+# Alle anderen kompletten Artikel
+# (Namen der Hauptdateien mit \documentclass usw.).
+ARTICLES = eqExam.ltx esslingen.tex Hyper.tex GaPBer2.tex willand.tex roemer.tex kiel.tex grob.tex mv41-lang.tex
+
+# Alle verwendeten bib-Dateien
+BIBS = ziegenhagen.bib
+
+
+# Enthält das Dokument inline-PS-Code (als Parameter von
+# \PSforPDF-Anweisungen; z.B. PSTricks, psfrag, EPS-Grafiken,...),
+# so ist hier "1" anzugeben.
+INLINE_PS = 0
+
+# Alle sonstigen Dateien, die in das Hauptdokument eingefügt werden.
+OTHER_INPUTS = impressum.tex termine.tex adressen.tex
+
+ifneq ($(ARTICLES_BIB),)
+ BBLS = $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)),$(addprefix $i, .bbl))
+endif
+
+ifeq ($(INLINE_PS),1)
+ PDF_CONTAINER = $(MAIN)-pics.pdf
+endif
+
+ALL_INPUTS = $(ARTICLES_BIB) $(ARTICLES) $(OTHER_INPUTS)
+
+ALL_ARTICLES = $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)),$(addprefix $i, .pdf)) \
+ $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES)),$(addprefix $i, .pdf))
+
+ARCHFILES = $(MAIN).tex $(ALL_INPUTS) $(BIBS) Makefile Makefile.in \
+ dtk.dtx dtk.ins
+
+
+all : rm-old ruecken.pdf $(MAIN).pdf
+
+corr : $(MAIN).pdf
+
+rm-old :
+ $(RM) ruecken.pdf $(MAIN).pdf
+
+articles : $(MAIN).inf $(ALL_ARTICLES) $(BBLS)
+
+$(MAIN).inf : $(MAIN).pdf
+
+$(MAIN).pdf : $(MAIN).tex $(ALL_INPUTS) $(BBLS) $(PDF_CONTAINER)
+
+$(MAIN).dvi : #$(MAIN).tex $(ALL_INPUTS)
+ export TEXMFHOME=./texmf
+ latex $(MAIN).tex
+
+$(MAIN)-pics.ps : $(MAIN).dvi
+ dvips -Ppdf -o $@ $<
+
+$(MAIN)-pics.pdf : $(MAIN)-pics.ps
+ GS_OPTIONS=-dPDFSETTINGS=/prepress ps2pdf $< $@
+
+%.bbl : %.aux $(BIBS)
+ bibtex $<
+
+%.aux : %.ltx
+ $(LATEX) $<
+ $(RM) $(basename $@).pdf
+
+%.aux : %.tex
+ $(LATEX) $<
+ $(RM) $(basename $@).pdf
+
+xxx :
+ @echo $(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB))
+ @echo
+ @echo $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)),$(addprefix $i, .bbl))
+ @echo
+ @echo $(OTHER_INPUTS)
+
+ruecken.pdf : ruecken.tex
+ $(LATEX) ruecken.tex
+
+ruecken.tex : $(MAIN).tex
+ @perl -n -e 'print "\
+ \\documentclass[11pt,a4paper]{article} \n\
+ \\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \n\
+ \\usepackage{lmodern} \n\
+ \\oddsidemargin=-1in \n\
+ \\unitlength=1mm \n\
+ \\begin{document} \n\
+ \\begin{picture}(210,4) \n\
+ \\put(5,2){\\makebox(100,0)[l]{\\tiny Die \\TeX nische Kom\\\"odie $$1}}\n\
+ \\put(0,0){\\line(-1,0){5}} \n\
+ \\put(0,0){\\line(0,-1){5}} \n\
+ \\put(0,4){\\line(-1,0){5}} \n\
+ \\put(0,4){\\line(0,1){5}} \n\
+ \\end{picture} \n\
+ \\end{document} \n\
+ " if m/DieTeXnischeKomoedie\{(.*)\}\{(.*)\}\{(.*)\}/' $(MAIN).tex > ruecken.tex
+
+clean : _clean
+ $(RM) $(addprefix $(MAIN), .inf)
+ $(RM) $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)),$(addprefix $i, \
+ .pdf .log .aux .bbl .blg .ind .ilg .gls .glg)) \
+ $(addprefix ruecken, .tex .log .aux) \
+ $(MAIN)-pics.pdf
+
+veryclean : clean
+ $(RM) $(MAIN).pdf ruecken.pdf $(ALL_ARTICLES)
+
+arch :
+ zip $(ARCHNAME).zip $(ARCHFILES)
+
+.PHONY : all corr arch clean veryclean
+# nur noetig, wenn Dateien mit dem selben Namen existieren
+
+.INTERMEDIATE : $(MAIN).dvi $(MAIN)-pics.ps
+
+ifneq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),arch)
+ include Makefile.in
+endif
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile.in b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e7f1be72b3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+
+# Makefile.latex -- Rules for processing LaTeX files with "make"
+#
+# Copyright (C) 1999,2005 Rolf Niepraschk, Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de, 2005/01/20
+
+.SUFFIXES : .tex .dvi .ps .pdf .eps .mp .mps
+
+SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+ifeq ($(BIBTEX),)
+ BIBTEX= bibtex
+endif
+ifeq ($(METAPOST),)
+ METAPOST = mpost
+endif
+ifeq ($(MAKEINDEX),)
+ MAKEINDEX = makeindex
+endif
+ifeq ($(MAKEGLOSSARY),)
+ MAKEGLOSSARY = makeindex
+endif
+ifeq ($(GREP),)
+ GREP = grep
+endif
+ifeq ($(DIFF),)
+ DIFF = diff
+endif
+ifeq ($(TOUCH),)
+ TOUCH = touch
+endif
+ifeq ($(CP),)
+ CP = cp
+endif
+
+ifneq ($(MAKEINDEXSTYLE),)
+ idxstyle = -s $(MAKEINDEXSTYLE)
+endif
+ifneq ($(MAKEGLOSSARYSTYLE),)
+ glostyle = -s $(MAKEGLOSSARYSTYLE)
+endif
+
+ifeq ($(RUNMAX),)
+ runmax = 5
+else
+ runmax = $(RUNMAX)
+endif
+
+bibwarn = 'There were undefined references'
+rerunwarn = 'Rerun to get cross-references right'
+linenowarn = 'rerun to get it right'
+# Package longtable Warning: Table widths have changed. Rerun LaTeX.
+multlab = 'There were multiply-defined labels'
+ltxmisc = $*.toc $*.lof $*.lot $*.idx $*.glo #$*.out
+
+%.dvi %.pdf : %.ltx
+ @ $(latexcmds)
+
+%.dvi %.pdf : %.tex
+ @ $(latexcmds)
+
+define latexcmds
+ $(TOUCH) $(ltxmisc) # create some files if necessary
+ runs=0; \
+ while test $$runs -lt $(runmax); do \
+ runs=`expr $$runs + 1`; rerun=0; status=0; \
+ $(foreach i, $(ltxmisc), $(CP) $i $i.old;) \
+ $(LATEX) '$(DOCUMENTOPT)\input{$<}'; \
+ if test $$? -gt 0; then status=`expr $$status + 64`; fi; \
+ if $(GREP) $(rerunwarn) $*.log > /dev/null; then rerun=1; fi; \
+ if $(GREP) $(linenowarn) $*.log > /dev/null; then rerun=1; fi; \
+ if $(DIFF) $*.idx $*.idx.old > /dev/null; then :; else \
+ $(MAKEINDEX) $(MAKEINDEXFLAGS) $(idxstyle) \
+ -t $*.ilg -o $*.ind $*.idx; \
+ if test $$? -gt 0; then status=`expr $$status + 256`; break; fi; \
+ fi; \
+ if $(DIFF) $*.glo $*.glo.old > /dev/null; then :; else \
+ $(MAKEGLOSSARY) $(MAKEGLOSSARYFLAGS) $(glostyle) \
+ -t $*.glg -o $*.gls $*.glo; \
+ if test $$? -gt 0; then status=`expr $$status + 512`; break; fi; \
+ fi; \
+ $(foreach i, $(ltxmisc), \
+ if $(DIFF) $i $i.old > /dev/null; then :; else rerun=1; fi;) \
+ echo '++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++' rerun=$$rerun runs=$$runs; \
+ if test $$rerun -eq 0; then break; fi; \
+ done; \
+ $(RM) $(ltxmisc:=.old); \
+ for i in $(ltxmisc); do if test ! -s $$i; then $(RM) $$i; fi; done; \
+ exit $$status
+endef
+
+_clean :
+ $(RM) $(addprefix $(MAIN), .log .aux .bbl .blg .ind .ilg .gls .glg \
+ $(ltxmisc))
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/adressen.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/adressen.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4fd9d8a2194
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/adressen.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+\begingroup\small
+\Dante{}\\\Label{adressen}%
+%Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX~\eV\\
+Postfach 10\,18\,40\\
+69008 Heidelberg
+
+\smallskip
+\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{}llr@{}}
+Tel.: & 0\,62\,21/2\,97\,66 (Mo., Mi.--Fr., 10.00--12.00\,Uhr)\\
+Fax: & 0\,62\,21/16\,79\,06\\
+E-Mail: & \texttt{dante@dante.de}\\[6pt]
+Konto: & VR Bank Rhein-Neckar eG\\
+ & BLZ 670\,900\,00\\
+ & Kontonummer 2\,310\,007\\
+ & \texttt{IBAN DE67\,6709\,0000\,0002\,3100\,07}\\
+ & \texttt{SWIFT-BIC GENODE61MA2}\\[4pt]
+% & \multicolumn{2}{l@{}}{Postbank Karlsruhe \hfill
+% (Auslands"uberweisungen)}\\
+% & BLZ 660\,100\,75\\
+% & Kontonummer 213\,400\,757\\
+% & \texttt{IBAN DE93\,6601\,0075\,0213\,4007\,57} \\
+% & \texttt{SWIFT-BIC PBNKDEFF}\\[9pt]
+%Beitr"age:
+% & Studenten & 30,-- \euro\\
+% & Vollmitglieder & 45,-- \euro\\
+% & Institutionelle Mitglieder & 65,-- \euro\\
+% & Firmen, die \TeX{} anwenden & 150,-- \euro\\
+% & Firmen, die \TeX{} verkaufen & 250,-- \euro\\[2pt]
+% & Nachlass f\"ur aktive Mitglieder & 10,-- \euro
+\end{tabular*}
+
+\section{Pr"asidium}\Label{vorstand}
+
+\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\quad}l@{\quad}l@{}}
+ Pr"asident: & Klaus H"oppner\Label{president}
+ & {\small\texttt{president@dante.de}}\\
+ Vizepr"asident: & Volker RW Schaa\Label{vice-president}
+ & {\small\texttt{vice-president@dante.de}}\\
+ Schatzmeister: & Tobias Sterzl\Label{treasurer}
+ & {\small\texttt{treasurer@dante.de}}\\
+ Schriftf"uhrer: & Manfred Lotz\Label{secretary}
+ & {\small\texttt{secretary@dante.de}}\\
+ Beisitzer: & G"unter Partosch\Label{beisitzer:gp}
+ %& {\small\texttt{advisor@dante.de}}
+ \\
+ & Bernd Raichle\Label{beisitzer:br}\\
+ & Herbert Vo\ss\Label{beisitzer:hv}
+\end{tabular}
+
+\section{Server}
+
+{\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.1}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\quad}l}
+\textsc{CTAN}: & \url{http://mirror.ctan.org} \iffalse \quad [\texttt{80.237.210.73}] \fi \\
+\textsc{DANTE}: & \url{http://www.dante.de/}\\
+\end{tabular}}
+
+\iffalse
+\section{Mailing-Listen}
+
+{\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.1}
+\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\quad}l}
+Deutschsprache \TeX-Nutzer: & \url{tex-d-l@listserv.gmd.de}\\
+Der Verein \dante{} & \url{dante-ev@urz.uni-heidelberg.de}
+\end{tabular}}
+\fi
+
+\par\endgroup % zurueckschalten auf \normalsize
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/editorial.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/editorial.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..196a7b1f55b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/editorial.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+\address{Herbert}{Vo\ss}{Wasgenstra\ss e 21\\
+ 14129 Berlin\\
+ \protect\url{herbert@dante.de}}
+%\address{Herbert}{Vo\ss}{Wasgenstraße 21\\14129 Berlin\\\protect\url{herbert@dante.de}}
+
+Liebe Leserinnen und Leser,
+
+Wunder geschehen ja eigentlich nicht in regelmäßigen Abständen, jedenfalls wären es dann definitionsgemäß
+keine mehr. So bleibt das Problem, wie man es bezeichnen soll, was Sie in den Händen halten. Dass bekanntermaßen nach einer Ausgabe
+der Zeitschrift "`\DTK"'
+natürlich immer auch vor einer Ausgabe ist, wird keinen erstaunen. Wenn aber nach einer Ausgabe der
+"`Eingabespeicher"' der eingereichten Manuskripte immer vollständig geleert ist, so bleibt es ein Wunder,
+dass bis zur nächsten Ausgabe dieser "`Speicher"' so aufgefüllt wird, dass es wieder für eine
+neue Ausgabe in gewohntem Umfang reicht. Der Dank gebührt natürlich den Autoren, denn ohne sie könnte es tatsächlich zu einem echten
+Wunder werden \ldots
+
+Dass \TeX, als reines Textsatzsystem konzipiert, durch derartig viele verschiedene Pakete
+zur Grafikausgabe unterstützt wird, ist ebenfalls ein kleines Wunder, zumal die
+Qualität mit der vom Textsatz gewohnten durchaus konkurrieren kann. In diesem Heft
+finden Sie wieder eine Variante beschrieben. Weiterhin lesen Sie den Bericht von
+der letzten Herbsttagung in Esslingen und dem Linuxtag in Kiel, auf dem \dante\ erstmalig
+vertreten war. Weiterhin finden Sie Texte, die eher den praktischen Bereich von \LaTeX\
+beleuchten und natürlich, wie gewohnt, die Liste der neuen Pakete. Der Umfang dieser Liste ist das letzte Wunder
+von dem man berichten kann, denn nach über 30 Jahren \TeX\ und 20 Jahren \LaTeX\ erscheint
+die innovative Kraft der \TeX-Gemeinde ungebrochen.
+
+
+\bigskip
+Ich wünsche Ihnen wie immer viel Spaß beim Lesen und verbleibe
+
+%\medskip
+%\enlargethispage{1.5ex}
+mit \TeX nischen Grüßen,
+
+Ihr Herbert Voß
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/grusswort.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/grusswort.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3ef706dc9f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/grusswort.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+\title{Gru"swort}\Label{gruss}
+\address{Volker RW}{Schaa}{siehe Seite~\protect\Pageref{president}}
+\address{Klaus}{Höppner}{siehe Seite~\protect\Pageref{vice-president}}
+\maketitle
+
+Liebe Mitglieder,
+
+dieses Grußwort
+
+Mit freundlichem Gruß
+
+\begin{tabular}{@{}ll}
+Volker RW Schaa & Klaus Höppner\\
+(Vorsitzender) & (Stellv. Vorsitzender)
+\end{tabular}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/impressum.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/impressum.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2d5d0776808
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/impressum.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+\begingroup\small
+"`Die \TeX{}nische Komödie"' ist die Mitgliedszeitschrift von
+\dante{} Der Bezugspreis ist im Mitgliedsbeitrag enthalten.
+Namentlich gekennzeichnete Beiträge geben die Meinung der
+Schreibenden wieder. Reproduktion oder Nutzung der erschienenen
+Beiträge durch konventionelle, elektronische oder beliebige andere
+Verfahren ist nur im nicht-kommerziellen Rahmen gestattet.
+Verwendungen in größerem Umfang bitte zur Information bei \dante{}
+melden.
+
+Beiträge sollten in Standard-\LaTeX-Quellcode unter Verwendung der
+Dokumentenklasse \texttt{dtk} erstellt und per \mbox{E-Mail} oder
+Datenträger (CD) an untenstehende Adresse
+der Redaktion geschickt werden. Sind
+spezielle Makros, \LaTeX-Pakete oder Schriften dafür nötig, so
+m"ussen auch diese komplett mitgeliefert werden. Außerdem m"ussen sie auf
+Anfrage Interessierten zugänglich gemacht werden. \smallskip
+
+
+Diese Ausgabe wurde mit
+\texttt{pdfTeX 3.1415926-1.40.10-2.2} %\TeX Live2007
+erstellt.
+%\texttt{LaTeX2e (2001/06/01)},
+%{\tt GSview\,1.3} (f"ur die Bildschirmdarstellung)
+%{\tt ghostview 1.3} (f"ur die Bildschirmdarstellung)
+%{\tt dviscr 1.4s} (f"ur die Bildschirmdarstellung),
+%{\tt dvipm 1.5a} (f"ur die Bildschirmdarstellung),
+%\texttt{Ac"-ro"-bat Read"-er 5.0.8}
+% und \texttt{windvi 0.67}
+%und
+%\texttt{xdvi(k)} \texttt{22.40k}
+%f"ur die Bild"-schirm"-dar"-stellung.
+%und \texttt{dvips(k)~5.86e}
+%(f"ur die endg"ultige Belichtung)
+%f"ur Korrektur und Belichtung.
+%Die Schriften zur Belichtung wurden mit
+%dem \MF-Modus \texttt{linoone} (1270\,dpi) berechnet.
+Als Stan"-dard-Schriften kamen die Type-1-Fonts Latin-Modern und LuxiMono zum Einsatz.
+
+\smallskip
+\vfill
+\noindent
+\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{ }l@{}}
+ Erscheinungsweise: & viertelj"ahrlich\\
+ Erscheinungsort: & Heidelberg\\
+ Auf\/lage: & 2700\\
+ Herausgeber: & \Dante\\
+ & Postfach 10\,18\,40\\
+ & 69008 Heidelberg\\[3pt]
+ & \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}ll@{}}
+% Tel.: & 0\,62\,21/2\,97\,66\\
+% Fax: & 0\,62\,21/16\,79\,06\\
+ E-Mail: & \texttt{dante@dante.de}\\
+ & \texttt{dtkred@dante.de} (Redaktion)
+ \end{tabular}\\[4pt]
+ Druck: & Konrad Triltsch Print und digitale Medien GmbH\\
+ & Johannes-Gutenberg-Str. 1--3,
+ 97199 Ochsenfurt-Hohestadt\\[4pt]
+ Redaktion: & Herbert Vo\ss\ (verantwortlicher Redakteur)\\
+ Mitarbeit : & %\raisebox{-\height}{\begin{minipage}{.75\textwidth}
+% \begin{multicols}3 \raggedright
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Luzia Dietsche} %\\
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Rudolf Herrmann} %\\
+% Moriz Hoffmann-""Axthelm \\
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Klaus H"oppner} % \\
+% Lutz Ihlenburg \\
+ \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Gert Ingold}
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Manfred Lotz}
+% Uwe M"unch \\
+% & \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Gerd Neugebauer} %\\
+ \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Rolf Niepraschk}
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{G"unter Partosch} \\
+% & \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Bernd Raichle} %\\
+ \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Christine Römer}
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Volker RW Schaa} %\\
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Hilmar Schlegel}
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Martin Schröder} \\
+% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Uwe Ziegenhagen}
+% \end{multicols}
+ %\end{minipage}}
+
+\end{tabular}
+
+\bigskip
+
+\noindent
+\makebox[\linewidth]{%
+ Redaktionsschluss für Heft 1/2010: 15. Januar 2010
+ \hfill
+ {ISSN 1434-5897}}
+
+\par\endgroup
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/komoedie.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/komoedie.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b73c4a887e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/komoedie.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+%\pdfpkresolution=1200\relax
+%\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics}
+%\PassOptionsToPackage{russian,greek,USenglish,ngerman}{babel}
+\PassOptionsToPackage{table,dvipsnames}{xcolor}
+%\PassOptionsToPackage{final}{listings}
+%\PassOptionsToPackage{X2,OT2,T1}{fontenc}
+\listfiles
+
+\documentclass[%tgschola,
+full,fleqn,08,ngerman]{dtk}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\usepackage{cmap}
+\usepackage{dtklogos,ragged2e,booktabs}
+\usepackage{eurosym}
+\usepackage[hyphens]{url}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{xspace,shortvrb}
+\usepackage[bottom]{footmisc}
+\usepackage{array,calc}
+\usepackage{enumerate,pdfpages}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\usepackage{subfig}
+\usepackage{babel}
+\usepackage{setspace}
+\AtBeginDocument{\selectlanguage{ngerman}}
+%\usepackage[protrusion=true,expansion=true]{microtype}
+\usepackage{microtype}
+
+\lstset{literate={ä}{{\"a}}1 {ö}{{\"o}}1 {ü}{{\"u}}1
+ {Ä}{{\"A}}1 {Ö}{{\"O}}1 {Ü}{{\"U}}1 {ß}{\ss}1,language=[LaTeX]TeX}
+
+%\usepackage[ragged]{sidecap}
+%\usepackage{picins}
+%\usepackage{pifont}
+
+\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{\abovecaptionskip}
+\let\Euro\euro
+\let\CTANurl\ctanurl
+\def\amsmath{\texttt{amsmath}}
+\def\cs#1{\texttt{\textbackslash#1}}
+%\renewcommand\floatpagefraction{.8}???
+%^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+% In `dtk.cls' hinein? RN
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%% Warum nicht in dtklogos drin?
+%%%\newcommand*\CMD[1]{\small\texttt{\textbackslash #1}}
+\newcommand*\CTAN{\textsc{CTAN}}
+%%%\newcommand*\AMSmath{\texttt{amsmath}}%
+% Was ist AMSmath? Ein Logo? RN
+
+%\urldef{\WinstonChang}\url{http://www.stdout.org/~winston/latex/}
+\lstset{basicstyle=\small\ttfamily}
+
+%\makeindex
+%\inputencoding{utf8}
+%\selectlanguage{ngerman}
+%\shorthandon{"}
+\makeaddresses
+
+
+\makeatletter
+\makeatother%
+
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\DieTeXnischeKomoedie{4/2009}{21}{November 2009}
+
+\part{Impressum}
+\vspace*{-2mm}
+\inputencoding{utf8}
+\DTKinput{impressum}
+
+\part{Editorial}
+\DTKinput{editorial}
+\markboth{}{}
+
+\clearpage
+
+
+\part[Hinter der B"uhne]{Hinter der B"uhne}[Vereinsinternes]
+\bgroup
+\inputencoding{latin1}
+\DTKinput{gruss-2009-3-m}
+\clearpage
+\DTKinput{mv41-lang}
+%\DTKinput{kassenbericht}
+\egroup
+
+\part{\TeX-Theatertage}
+\DTKinput{esslingen}
+\bgroup
+\inputencoding{latin1}
+\DTKinput{kiel}
+\egroup
+
+
+\part{Bretter, die die Welt bedeuten}
+
+\DTKinput{eqExam}
+
+\bgroup
+\inputencoding{latin9}
+\DTKinput{ziegenhagen}
+\DTKinput{GaPBer2}
+\DTKinput{Hyper}
+\DTKinput{willand}
+\DTKinput{grob}
+\egroup
+
+\clearpage
+
+%\part{Tipps und Tricks}
+
+%\DTKinput{niepraschk0}
+\clearpage
+
+\part{Von fremden Bühnen}
+\vspace*{-4ex}
+\bgroup
+\inputencoding{latin1}
+\DTKinput{neuepakete}
+\egroup
+
+
+\part{Bücher und Rezensionen}
+
+\DTKinput{roemer}
+
+%\part{Leserbriefe}
+
+\clearpage
+\part{Spielplan}
+
+\DTKinput{termine}
+\clearpage
+
+\DTKinput{stammtische}
+
+\part{Adressen}
+
+\DTKinput{adressen}
+
+\clearpage
+\markboth{}{}
+\listofaddresses
+\begingroup
+%\raggedright%
+\tableofcontents
+\endgroup
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/ruecken.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/ruecken.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a6130ee72a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/ruecken.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+\documentclass[11pt,a4paper]{article}
+
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+\usepackage{lmodern}
+
+\oddsidemargin=-1in
+
+\unitlength=1mm
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{picture}(210,4)
+
+ \put(5,2){\makebox(100,0)[l]{\tiny Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie 4/2009}}
+
+ \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){5}}
+
+ \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){5}}
+
+ \put(0,4){\line(-1,0){5}}
+
+ \put(0,4){\line(0,1){5}}
+
+\end{picture}
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/rueckenNeu.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/rueckenNeu.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..78c7c804f9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/rueckenNeu.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+\documentclass[11pt,a4paper,landscape]{article}
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\usepackage{xcolor,geometry}
+\oddsidemargin=-1in
+
+\unitlength=1mm
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{picture}(210,4)
+
+ \put(0,1.2){\colorbox{black!10}{\makebox[700pt][l]{\rule[-2ex]{0pt}{5ex}\kern5mm\tiny
+ Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie 1/2009\hfill~}}}
+
+ \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){5}}
+ \put(210,0){\line(1,0){5}}
+
+ \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){5}}
+ \put(210,0){\line(0,-1){5}}
+
+ \put(0,4){\line(-1,0){5}}
+ \put(210,4){\line(1,0){5}}
+
+ \put(0,4){\line(0,1){5}}
+ \put(210,4){\line(0,1){5}}
+\end{picture}
+
+\end{document}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/stammtische.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/stammtische.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9a41719e9c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/stammtische.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,281 @@
+\chapter{Stammtische}\Label{stammt}
+\markboth{}{}
+\bgroup\small
+\emph{In verschiedenen Städten im Einzugsbereich von \dante{} finden
+ regelmäßig Treffen von \TeX-Anwendern statt, die für jeden offen
+ sind. Im WWW gibt es aktuelle Informationen unter
+ \Path{http://www.dante.de/index/Stammtische.html}.
+}
+\vspace*{2pt}
+%\vspace*{8pt}
+
+\begin{multicols}{2}\small\raggedright\raggedcolumns
+ \renewcommand\rolllabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep\bf #1\hfill}
+ \begin{roll}\footnotesize
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{-.5ex}
+ \item[Aachen] \ \\
+ Torsten Bronger\\ \url{bronger@physik.rwth-aachen.de}\\
+ \emph{Gaststätte Knossos, Templergraben 28\\
+ Zweiter Donnerstag im Monat, 19.00\,Uhr}
+
+ \item[Berlin] \ \\
+ Rolf Niepraschk\\ % mnr 569
+% Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt\\
+% Abbestr. 2--12\\
+ Tel.: 0\,30/3\,48\,13\,16\\
+ \url{Rolf.Niepraschk@gmx.de}\\
+% \emph{Gasthaus Pali-Eck \\ Koppenstr. 41\\
+ \emph{Gaststätte Bärenschenke\\
+ Friedrichstraße 124\\
+ 10117 Berlin Mitte\\
+ Zweiter Donnerstag im Monat,
+ 19.00\,Uhr}
+%
+ \item[Bremen] \ \\
+ Winfried Neugebauer\\
+ Tel.: 04\,21-8\,28\,65\,14\\
+ \url{tex@wphn.de}\\
+ \emph{Wechselnder Ort\\
+ Erster Donnerstag im Monat,
+ 18.30\,Uhr}
+%
+% \item[Chemnitz] \ \\
+% Ralf König\\
+% Tel.: 03\,41/4\,11\,58\,00\\
+% \verb|ralf.koenig@s1998.tu-chemnitz.de|\\
+% \emph{Studenten-Klub "`bspw"'\\ Vettersstra� 70/72, 2.OG\\
+% Dritter Mittwoch im Monat, 18.00\,Uhr}
+%
+ \item[Darmstadt] \ \\
+ Karlheinz Geyer\\
+ \url{geyerk.fv.tu@nds.tu-darmstadt.de}\\
+ \emph{Hostaria Toskana\\
+ Nieder-Ramstädter-Straße 13\\
+ 64283 Darmstadt\\
+ \url{http://www.da-tex.org}\\
+ Erster Freitag im Monat, ab 19.30\,Uhr}
+%
+ \item[Dortmund] \ \\
+ Martin Schr\"oder\\
+ \url{martin@oneiros.de}\\
+ Tel.: 0231-1206574\\
+ \emph{Wechselnder Ort\\
+ Zweiter Mittwoch im Monat, 18.30\,Uhr}
+%
+ \item[Dresden] \ \\
+ Carsten Vogel\\
+ \url{lego@wh10.tu-dresden.de}\\
+ \emph{Studentenwohnheim,
+ Borsbergstraße 34, Dresden, Ortsteil Striesen\\
+ ca. alle 8 Wochen, Mittwoch, 19.00\,Uhr}
+% \columnbreak\columnbreak\columnbreak
+
+ \item[Düsseldorf] \ \\
+ Georg Verweyen\\
+ \url{Georg.Verweyen@web.de}\\
+ \emph{Bistro/Café Zicke\\
+ Böckerstr. 5\,a (Ecke Bergerallee)\\
+ 40213 Düsseldorf\\
+ Zweiter Mittwoch in ungeraden Monaten, 20.00\,Uhr}
+%
+%\columnbreak
+ \item[Erlangen] \ \\
+ Walter Schmidt, Peter Seitz\\
+ \url{w.a.schmidt@gmx.net}\\% \url{p.seitz@ks-ingenieurconsult.de}\\
+% \url{http://home.vr-web.de/was/stammtisch.html}
+ \emph{Gaststätte "`Deutsches Haus"'\\
+ Luitpoldstraße 25\\
+ Dritter Dienstag im Monat, 19.00\,Uhr}%
+%
+ \item[Freiburg] \ \\
+ Heiko Oberdiek\\
+ Tel.: 07\,61/4\,34\,05\\
+ \url{oberdiek@uni-freiburg.de}\\
+ \url{http://www.inacker.de/TeX/}\\
+ \emph{Wechselnder Ort\\
+ Dritter Donnerstag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr}%
+%
+ \item[Hamburg] \ \\%\raggedright
+ Lothar Fröhling\\
+ \url{lothar@thefroehlings.de}\\
+ \emph{Zum Schwarzenberg\\
+ Schwarzenbergstr. 80 -- 21073 Hamburg\\
+ Letzter Dienstag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr}%
+% \vspace*{0pt}%
+%
+ \item[Hannover] \ \\
+ Mark Heisterkamp\\
+% Seminarraum RRZN, Regionales Rechenzentrum f"ur Niedersachsen,
+% Schloßwender Str. 5\\
+% Tel.: 05\,11/7\,62\,51\,34\\
+ \url{heisterkamp@rrzn.uni-hannover.de}\\
+ \emph{Seminarraum RRZN\\
+ Schlo"swender Straße 5\\
+ Zweiter Donnerstag im Monat,
+ 18.30\,Uhr}
+%
+ \item[Heidelberg] \ \\
+ Martin Wilhelm Leidig\\
+ Tel.: 06203/402203 \\
+ \url{moss@moss.in-berlin.de}\\
+ Anmeldeseite zur Mailingliste: \\[1pt]
+ \parbox{\columnwidth}{%
+ \url{http://mailman.moss.in-berlin.de/mailman/listinfo/stammtisch-hd-moss.in-berlin.de}}\\[1pt]
+ \emph{"`Goldener Hirsch"'\\
+ Hauptstr. 18, 68526 Ladenburg\\
+ Letzter Freitag im Monat, ab 19.30 Uhr}
+%
+ \item[Karlsruhe] \ \\
+ Klaus Braune\\
+ Tel.: 07\,21/6\,08\,40\,31\\
+ \url{braune@rz.uni-karlsruhe.de}\\
+ \emph{Universit"at Karlsruhe, Rechenzentrum\\
+ Zirkel 2, 3.\,OG, Raum 316\\
+ Erster Donnerstag im Monat,
+ 19.30\,Uhr}
+%\columnbreak\columnbreak\columnbreak
+
+\iffalse
+ \item[Kiel] \ \\
+ Karsten Heymann\\
+ \url{karsten.heymann@gmx.de}\\
+ \emph{Letzter Donnerstag im Monat, 19.00\, Uhr\\
+ Ort siehe \url{http://zaubberer.net/latexwiki}}
+\fi
+ \item[Köln] \ \\
+ Helmut Siegert\\
+% \url{b.hopp@lepkes-frings.de}\\
+ \emph{Institut f"ur Kristallographie\\
+ Zülpicher Straße 49b\\
+ Letzter Dienstag im Monat,
+ 19.30\,Uhr}
+% 50674 Köln
+% \columnbreak\columnbreak\columnbreak
+% \item[Konstanz] \ \\
+% Matthias Weisgerber, Hraban Ramm \\
+% \verb|weisgerb@fmi.uni-konstanz.de|, \verb|hraban@fiee.net|\\
+% \emph{Restaurant Rheingold\\
+% Spanierstra� 3\\
+% unregelm�ig}
+%
+ \item[München] \ \\
+ Uwe Siart\\
+ \url{uwe.siart@tum.de}\\
+ \url{http://www.siart.de/typografie/stammtisch.xhtml}\\
+ \emph{Gaststätte "`Marktwirt"'\\
+ Heiliggeiststr.\,2 \\
+ Erste Woche des Monats an wechselnden Tagen, 19.00\,Uhr}
+%
+%
+% \item[Münster] \ \\
+% Johannes Reese\\
+% \url{reese@linguist.de}\\
+% \emph{Gaststätte "`Sabroso"'\\ Mauritzstraße 19\\
+% nach Vereinbarung}
+%
+% \item[Oldenburg] \ \\
+% Konrad Blum\\
+% \verb+konrad@blum.physik.uni-oldenburg.de+\\
+% \emph{Bistro "`DaCapo"'\\
+% Friedhofsweg 64 \\%26121 Oldenburg
+% Zweiter Montag im Monat, 20.00\,Uhr}
+%
+% \columnbreak\columnbreak\columnbreak
+ \item[Stuttgart] \ \\\nopagebreak
+ Bernd Raichle\\
+ \url{bernd.raichle@gmx.de}\\
+ \emph{Bar e Ristorante "`Valle"'\\
+ Geschwister-Scholl-Str. 3\\
+ Zweiter Dienstag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr}
+
+ \item[Trier] \ \\
+ Martin Sievers\\
+ \url{stammtisch-trier@texberatung.de}\\
+ \emph{Fetzenkneipe (Haus Fetzenreich)\\
+ Sichelstraße 36 (beim Sieh-Um-Dich)\\
+% 54290 Trier\\
+ Dritter Montag des Monats, 20.15\,Uhr}
+
+%
+%Ort: Ratskeller Ulm (Rathaus Ulm) 16-3-2009
+%Zeit: jeder dritte Montag im Monat um 19.30
+%Webseite: http://latex.in-ulm.de
+%Ansprechpartner: Adelheid Grob, latex@heidi.in-ulm.de
+
+ \item[Ulm] \ \\
+ Adelheid Grob\\
+ \url{latex@heidi.in-ulm.de}\\
+ \url{http://latex.in-ulm.de}\\
+ \emph{Ratskeller Ulm (Rathaus Ulm)\\
+ Dritter Montag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr}
+%
+ \item[Wuppertal] \ \\\raggedright
+ Andreas Schrell\\ % mnr 86
+% Erlenstr. 1\\
+ Tel.: 02193/53\,10\,93\\
+ \url{as@schrell.de}\\
+ \emph{Restaurant Croatia "`Haus Johannisberg"'\\
+ Südstraße 10\\
+ an der Schwimmoper Wuppertal-Elberfeld\\
+ Zweiter Donnerstag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr}%
+%
+ \item[W\"urzburg] \ \\
+ Bastian Hepp\\
+ \url{LaTeX@sning.de}\\
+ \emph{nach Vereinbarung}
+%
+% \item[Z\"urich] \ \\
+% Johannes Reese\\
+% \url{reese@spw.unizh.ch}\\
+% \emph{nach Vereinbarung}
+%
+ \end{roll}%
+\end{multicols}%
+\egroup
+
+\markboth{Stammtische}{Stammtische}
+
+
+\iffalse
+\vfill
+\bgroup\fboxsep=10pt
+\fbox{\parbox{\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule}{%
+\emph{Der Bayerische \TeX-Stammtisch 2009}
+
+\medskip
+Jedes Jahr veranstalten die \TeX-Stammtische aus München, Erlangen und
+Ulm ein gemeinsames Sommerfest mit Fachvorträgen und anschließendem Grillabend.
+
+Das diesjährige Sommerfest findet statt am Samstag, 27.\,Juni 2009 in Ulm.
+Beginn: voraussichtlich 14 Uhr; Ende: offen.
+%
+Weitere Informationen und Kontaktadresse siehe \url{http://latex.in-ulm.de/baytex09/}.
+
+Gäste von außerhalb Bayerns bzw. Ulms sind herzlich willkommen! }}
+\egroup
+\fi
+
+\vfill
+
+\begin{center}
+%\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess8}\hfill%
+%\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess0}
+
+%\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess1}\hfill%
+%\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess2}
+
+\minipage[b]{0.495\textwidth}
+\includegraphics[width=0.9\linewidth]{Bilder/ess3}
+~\rotatebox{90}{\small(Fotos: Martin Sievers)}
+\endminipage\hfill%
+\minipage[b]{0.495\textwidth}
+\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess6}\\[2pt]
+\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess5}
+\endminipage
+
+\end{center}
+
+
+\endinput
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/termine.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/termine.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..68c4ef37bf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/termine.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+
+\vspace*{-3mm}
+
+\chapter{Termine}\label{termine}
+
+\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{@{}rX@{}}
+
+\iffalse
+\multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\textbf{2009}} \\[3pt]
+
+28.\,7. -- 31.\,7. &
+ \textbf{TUG 2009}\newline
+ Notre Dame (Indiana), USA\newline
+ \url{http://tug.org/tug2009/} \\[3pt]
+
+24.\,8. -- 28.\,8. &
+ \textbf{Euro\TeX\ 2009 und Con\TeX t meeting}\newline
+ Den Haag, Niederlande\newline
+ \url{http://www.ntg.nl/EuroTeX2009/} \\[3pt]
+
+12.\,9. &
+ \textbf{Herbsttagung}\newline und 41.\,Mitgliederversammlung von \dante\newline
+ Hochschule Esslingen\newline
+ \url{http://www.dante.de/events/mv41.html} \\[3pt]
+
+
+2.\,10. -- 3.\,10. &
+ \textbf{Kieler Linux- und OpenSource-Tage} \newline
+ Kieler Innovations- und Technologiezentrum\newline
+ Schauenburgerstr. 116, 24118 Kiel\\[3pt]
+
+13.\,10. &
+ \textbf{GuiT} 2007 meeting\newline
+ Pisa, Italien\newline
+ \url{http://www.guit.sssup.it/GuITmeeting/2007/2007.en.php/} \\[3pt]
+\fi
+
+
+\multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\textbf{2010}} \\[3pt]
+%25.\,2. -- 27.\,2. &
+Februar &
+ \textbf{DANTE\,2010}\newline und 42.\,Mitgliederversammlung von \dante\newline
+ Universität Dortmund\newline
+ ~%\url{http://www.dante.de/dante/events/dante2009/}
+ \\[3pt]
+
+13.\,3. -- 14.\,3. &
+ \textbf{Chemnitzer Linuxtage\,2010} \newline
+ Technische Universität Chemnitz\newline
+ 09107 Chemnitz\newline
+ \url{http://www.chemnitzer.linux-tage.de}\\[3pt]
+
+
+\iffalse
+20.\,8. -- 25.\,8. &
+ \textbf{2nd Con\TeX t user meeting}\newline
+ Bohinj, Slovenia\newline
+ \url{http://meeting.contextgarden.net/2008/}\\[3pt]
+
+13.\,10. &
+ \textbf{GuiT} 2008 meeting\newline
+ Pisa, Italien\newline
+ \url{http://www.guit.sssup.it/GuITmeeting/2008/2008.en.php/} \\[3pt]
+\fi
+%\multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{2009}} \\[3pt]
+
+\end{tabularx}
+
+\vfill
+\begin{center}
+\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess8}\hfill%
+\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess0}
+
+\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess1}\hfill%
+\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess2}\\
+{\footnotesize(Fotos: Martin Sievers)}
+%\minipage[b]{0.495\textwidth}
+%\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess3}
+%\endminipage\hfill%
+%\minipage[b]{0.495\textwidth}
+%\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess6}\\[9.5mm]
+%\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess5}
+%\endminipage
+\end{center}
+
+\clearpage
+
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist
index 629cc146228..8dbd8bb9f59 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
+%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2005-03-23 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG"
%%
%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.8 2002/04/10 21:03:42 gene Exp gene $
%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Purpose:
%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@
%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
%%
%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
-%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2005 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
%%
%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index ef3248f0b1e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4618 +0,0 @@
-%\iffalse
-%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
-%<*!ist>
-%%
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% Purpose:
-%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
-%%
-%% Documentation:
-%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
-%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
-%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
-%%
-%%
-%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
-%% Mainzer Str. 8
-%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
-%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
-%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
-%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
-%%
-%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
-%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
-%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
-%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
-%% he says so in writing.
-%%
-%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
-%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
-%% modifications are indicated.
-%%
-%%
-%<*class>
-%% This class is still under development and may be replaced with a
-%% new version which provides enhanced functionality.
-%</class>
-%<*!class>
-%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with
-%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality.
-%</!class>
-%%
-%\fi
-%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \title{A \LaTeX\ Class and Style for\\``Die \TeX{}nische
-% Kom{\"o}die''\thanks{This file documents \filename\ version
-% \fileversion\ as of \filedate.}}
-% \author{Gerd Neugebauer\\
-% Mainzer Str.\ 8\\
-% 56321 Rhens (Germany)\\
-% Net: \texttt{gene@gerd-neugebauer.de}}
-%
-% \date{{\footnotesize Documentation date: \docdate}}
-%
-% \maketitle
-%
-%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \changes{0.24}{1996/05/10}{First public release.}
-% \changes{0.25}{1996/05/27}{Towards the new layout}
-% \changes{0.26}{1996/05/27}{Towards the new layout}
-% \changes{0.27}{1996/05/27}{Towards the new layout}
-% \changes{0.28}{1996/05/27}{Towards the new layout}
-% \changes{0.29}{1996/06/21}{Logos improved. ContentsArt slightly modified.}
-% \changes{1.0}{1996/07/18}{The new layout is ready. (DTK 1/96 in print)}
-% \changes{1.1}{1996/09/13}{Fixing a minor problem with long titles.\\
-% double backslash in titles are now ignored in headlines and toc.}
-% \changes{1.3}{1997/02/08}{Ancient layout moved to a class option file.}
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/02/04}{Merge changes due to RN made to
-% generated files back into DTX (HjG).}
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/02/04}{M-x delete-trailing-whitespace (HjG).}
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/03/23}{File userpackages.tex now generated (RN/HjG).}
-% \changes{1.9a}{2005/10/29}{added flushleft environment (RN/hv).}
-% \changes{1.9b}{2006/08/11}{added macro CTANurl (hv).}
-% \changes{1.10}{2007/08/28}{new dtx file created (hv).}
-%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%
-% \DoNotIndex{\ ,\",\',\.,\[,\\,\],\^,\`,\~,\(,\),\,,\/,\-,\:,\=,\@,\~,\^}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@M,\@dottedtocline}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@highpenalty,\@ifnextchar,\@ifstar}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@ifundefined,\@namedef,\@plus,\@pnumwidth,\@startsection}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@starttoc}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@tempdima,\@tempdimb,\@thefnmark,\@undefined}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@ixpt,\@vpt,\@vipt,\@viipt,\@viiipt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\@xpt,\@xipt,\@xiipt,\@xivpt,\@xviipt,\@xxpt,\@xxvpt}
-% \DoNotIndex{\AA,\AE,\AtBeginDocument}
-% \DoNotIndex{\CurrentOption,\DeclareOption,\H,\Huge,\L,\LARGE,\LaTeX,\Large}
-% \DoNotIndex{\LoadClass,\O,\OE,\OptionNotUsed,\PassOptionsToClass}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ProcessOptions,\ProvidesClass,\ProvidesPackage}
-% \DoNotIndex{\RequirePackage,\TeX}
-% \DoNotIndex{\aa,\addcontentsline,\addpenalty,\advance,\addvspace,\ae}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ast,\arabic}
-% \DoNotIndex{\b,\baselineskip,\begin,\begingroup,\bf,\bgroup,\egroup}
-% \DoNotIndex{\bigskip,\box,\bullet}
-% \DoNotIndex{\c,\cal,\catcode,\char,\chardef,\circ,\clearpage,\closein}
-% \DoNotIndex{\closeout,\clubpenalty,\count,\csname}
-% \DoNotIndex{\d,\def,\dimen,\diamond,\divide,\documentclass,\dp}
-% \DoNotIndex{\divide}
-% \DoNotIndex{\else,\em,\empty,\end,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endlist}
-% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fbox,\fi,\footskip,\framebox,\frenchspacing}
-% \DoNotIndex{\futurelet,\gdef,\global,\gobble}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hangafter,\hangindent,\hbox,\headheight,\headsep,\hfil}
-% \DoNotIndex{\hfill,\hrule,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\ht,\huge,\ifcat,\ifcase}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ifeof,\ifdim,\ifnum,\ifx}
-% \DoNotIndex{\ignorespaces,\immediate,\index,\input,\it}
-% \DoNotIndex{\itemindent,\itemsep,\jobname,\kern,\l,\labelsep,\labelwidth}
-% \DoNotIndex{\large,\leavevmode,\leftmark,\leftskip,\let,\list}
-% \DoNotIndex{\llap,\long,\lower}
-% \DoNotIndex{\m@th,\makebox,\magstep,\makeindex,\markboth,\mbox,\medskip}
-% \DoNotIndex{\multiply}
-% \DoNotIndex{\newblock,\newcommand,\newcount,\newenvironment,\newfont}
-% \DoNotIndex{\newif,\newpage,\newread,\newwrite}
-% \DoNotIndex{\nobreak,\noindent,\normalsize,\null,\o,\oe}
-% \DoNotIndex{\openin,\openout,\or,\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\parbox}
-% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parsep,\parskip,\partopsep}
-% \DoNotIndex{\penalty,\quad}
-% \DoNotIndex{\raggedbottom,\raise,\relax,\renewcommand,\renewenvironment}
-% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\rightskip,\rm,\rule}
-% \DoNotIndex{\sbox,\sc,\scriptsize,\section,\selectfont,\setcounter}
-% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sf,\sfcode,\sl}
-% \DoNotIndex{\sloppy,\small,\space,\ss,\string,\symbol}
-% \DoNotIndex{\t,\tenex,\textstyle,\the,\thepage,\thispagestyle,\time,\tiny}
-% \DoNotIndex{\topmargin,\topsep,\tt,\typeout}
-% \DoNotIndex{\u,\unitlength,\usecounter,\v,\varepsilon,\vbox}
-% \DoNotIndex{\vfill,\vsize,\vskip,\vspace,\vss}
-% \DoNotIndex{\wd,\widowpenalty,\write,\xdef,\z@}
-%
-%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \CheckSum{2624}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%</!ist>
-%
-% \begin{abstract}
-%
-% dtk.dtx provides a class and style file for typesetting ``Die
-% \TeX\-nische Ko\-m\"o\-die''---the communications of the German
-% \TeX{} Users Group DANTE e.V. This means that this class can be
-% used by article writers to typeset a single article as well as to
-% produce the complete journal.
-%
-% The class and style file is written in a way that it can be used
-% both with \LaTeX\,2.09 and \LaTeXe. Thus it can be used by all
-% persons which are familiar with any flavor of \LaTeX.
-%
-% The features of \LaTeXe\ are provided in the \LaTeX\,2.09 mode only
-% to a certain extend. Thus it might not be possible to typeset an
-% article prepared for \LaTeXe\ with \LaTeX\,2.09.
-%
-% On the other side it is possible to process an article prepared
-% for \LaTeX\,2.09 with \LaTeXe{} (in native mode). This is justified
-% since \LaTeXe{} is the standard nowadays and \LaTeX\,2.09 should
-% cease to exists in the next decade.
-% \end{abstract}
-%
-% \newpage
-% \tableofcontents
-% \newpage
-%
-% \section{The History}
-%
-% This documentclass/style is a complete reimplementation of a
-% predecesor style. This predecessor style was a modification of
-% the tugboat.sty which has been carried out mainly by Gabriele
-% Kruljac. Some improvements have been made in this style by
-% Joachim Schrod and Luzia Dietsche.
-%
-% In 1995 the it appeared necessary to have a document class for the
-% production of ``Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie''. Up to this time the
-% communications of the German speaking \TeX{} users group had been
-% typeset with \LaTeX\,2.09 which was already outdated at this
-% time. In addition ideas for an improved layout had been collected
-% which should be incorporated into the new class.
-%
-% Thus Gerd Neugebauer started to derive a new class by modifying
-% options and macros of the standard document class \texttt{article}.
-%
-% At this time it was not unususal for many installations not to
-% provide the current \LaTeXe{} but still to have \LaTeX\,2.09
-% only. Thus one design decision was to have a document style as
-% well as a document class. The requirement was met by providing a
-% set of definitions which emulate some of the new features of
-% \LaTeX{} under the old releases.
-%
-% The coding was done by Gerd Neugebauer but many influences of
-% others have found their way into the code. Even so nearly no code
-% has been taken from the predecessor style the layout has been
-% copied in the first release of dtk.dtx (1.0).
-%
-% Into the next releases (1.1 to 1.3) many changes for the new
-% layout have been incorporated. Many suggestions of the editorial
-% board of ``Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie'' had been integrated.
-% Especially the following persons contributed during this process:
-% Luzia Dietsche, Bernd Raichle, Volker RW Schaa, Rainer Sch\"opf,
-% and Andreas Dafferner.
-%
-% Over the years several additions and corrections have made it
-% into some additional packages which have been used for the
-% production of ``Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie''. Especially in 1999
-% the fonts have been changed from Computer Modern to EC. In 2000
-% the text area has been changed. Finally all changes have been
-% integrated into dtk.dtx. The contributions for this release came
-% from Bernd Raichle, Peter Willardt, Rolf Niepraschk, and Werner
-% Lemberg.
-%
-% The 2002 edition of dtk.dtx includes some minor changes to
-% support the use besides the production of ``Die \TeX nische
-% Kom\"odie''. In addition the major change is that the
-% bibliography is typeset in ragged right.
-%
-%
-% \section{The User Interface}
-%
-% The user interface can be divided into two parts. The first part
-% concerns the normal user who is writing a single article. The
-% second part concerns the user who composes a complete journal.
-%
-%
-% \subsection{The User Interface for Article Writers}
-%
-% The user interface for ordinary users is mainly the interface as
-% it is provided by the documentclass article. In addition to the
-% normal commands the following macros and environments are defined:
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\address}
-% This macro is used to put the address of an author into the list of
-% authors. It should be given before the \verb|\maketitle| command. The
-% first argument is the first name of an author. The second argument is the
-% last name of the author. The third argument is it's address. Several
-% lines in the address are separated by \verb|\\|. Missing arguments should
-% be filled with \verb|\null|.
-%
-% Several invocations of \verb|address| are possible. E.g. if the article
-% has been written by several authors. The address and the author can be
-% omitted completely --- e.g. for anonoymous letters to the editor. But
-% this should not be the normal case.
-%
-% \DescribeEnv{abstract}
-% Each article should have be started with a short paragraph describing
-% what this article is about. This paragraph is called abstract. The
-% environment \verb|abstract| is meant for marking a paragraph as
-% abstract.
-%
-%
-%
-% The following restrictions should be taken into account:
-%
-% The sectioning commands are mapped to their star variants. This
-% means that the commands like \verb|\section| are not numbered. It
-% should not be tried to to put references to those commands.
-%
-% The following logos are provided by this class and separately by
-% the package \verb|dtklogos| if not defined somewhere else. You
-% are strongly encouraged to use those macros to typeset the logos
-% instead of making your own.
-% \smallskip
-%
-% \begin{tabular}{ll}
-% \texttt{\char'134AmSTeX} &\AmSTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134AmS} &\AmS \\
-% \texttt{\char'134BibTeX} &\BibTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134dante} &\dante \\
-% \texttt{\char'134Dante} &\Dante \\
-% \texttt{\char'134DTK} &\DTK \\
-% \texttt{\char'134eTeX} &\eTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134eV} &\eV \\
-% \texttt{\char'134emTeX} &\emTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134LAmSTeX} &\LAmSTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134LaTeXTeX} &\LaTeXTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134LaTeXe} &\LaTeXe \\
-% \texttt{\char'134LaTeX} &\LaTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134LyX} &\LyX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134METAFONT} &\MF \\
-% \texttt{\char'134METAPOST} &\MP \\
-% \texttt{\char'134MF} &\MF \\
-% \texttt{\char'134MP} &\MP \\
-% \texttt{\char'134MakeIndex}&\MakeIndex \\
-% \texttt{\char'134NFSS} &\NFSS \\
-% \texttt{\char'134NTS} &\NTS \\
-% \texttt{\char'134PS} &\PS \\
-% \texttt{\char'134PiCTeX} &\PiCTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134PubliCTeX}&\PubliCTeX \\
-% \texttt{\char'134TUG} &\TUG \\
-% \texttt{\char'134TeXXeT} &\TeXXeT \\
-% \texttt{\char'134TeXeT} &\TeXeT \\
-% \texttt{\char'134WinEdt} &\WinEdt \\
-% \texttt{\char'134WinEdtKK} &\WinEdtKK
-% \end{tabular}
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\footnote}
-% Footnotes are typeset in a special way. As a consequence of the
-% inplementation \TeX{} is not allowed to split footnotes across
-% several pages. Thus you have to keep your footnotes short. It is
-% bad style to pack the main body of text into footnotes (except
-% for critical editions).
-%
-% \subsection{Logical Markup}
-%
-% One of the advantages of \LaTeX\ is the possiblity to use logical
-% markup. For this purpose several markup macros are provided.
-% Unfortunately the macros provided are not sufficient in several
-% situations. Thus this class provides some additional markup
-% macros to come closer to the ideal situation.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\File}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting file names.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Package}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting package names.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Program}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting program names.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Command}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting command names.
-% For instance command names are relevant when talking about Unix
-% commands.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Macro}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting macro names.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Environment}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting environment names.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Email}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting email addresses.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\CTANurl}
-% Use this macro instead of \verb+\url+ for references to the \CTAN.
-% It uses the \verb+\href+ and \verb+\nolinkurl+ from the package \Package{hyperref}.
-% An example for a reference is \verb+\CTANurl{graphics/pstricks/}+: \CTANurl{graphics/pstricks/}
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Acronym}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting acronyms. It is
-% highly recommended to use this macro sparsingly
-%
-%
-% \subsection{The Interface for the Production of the Whole Journal}
-%
-% The first thing one needs to know is that a complete journal
-% starts with a title page. This title page contains the volume,
-% the number and the date of publication. Since part of this
-% information is used later it is stored in macros.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\DieTeXnischeKomoedie}
-% The macro \verb|\DieTeXnischeKomoedie| is provided for this purpose. It
-% takes three arguments. The first argument is the number. The second
-% argument is the annual set and the third argument is the publication
-% date.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\CoverArt}
-% The macro \verb|\DieTeXnischeKomoedie| calls the macro \verb|\CoverArt|
-% to typeset the cover page. \verb|\CoverArt| gets the same three arguments
-% as the calling macro \verb|\DieTeXnischeKomoedie|. This macro is
-% responsible to fill the first page adequately. This maro might be
-% redefined to alter the layout of the journal.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Label}
-% The macro \verb|\label| has been redefined to be local for each
-% article. Thus it turned out to be necessary to allow assigning of
-% labels which are not restricted by this ``module system''. The
-% macro \verb|\Label| sets such a global label.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Ref}
-% The macro \verb|\ref| has been redefined to be local for each
-% article. The macro \verb|\Ref| references a global label set with
-% \verb|Label|.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Pageref}
-% The macro \verb|\pageref| has been redefined to be local for each
-% article. The macro \verb|\Pageref| references a global label set with
-% \verb|Label|.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\NeedPackage}
-% Usually the article for the complete journal are stored in
-% different files. If an article requires a package it has to be
-% loaded in the preamble of the document. The macro
-% \verb|\NeedPackage| provides a means to specify the required
-% packages in the article files. Unfortunately \LaTeX{} does not
-% provide a way to load missing packages in the document itself
-% thus the only reasonable action for this macros is to issue a
-% warning message if a needed package is not found. Nevertheless
-% this helps finding potential problems.
-%
-%
-%
-%
-% \vfill\noindent\hrulefill%^^A---------------------------------------------
-%
-% \emph{To be completed}
-%
-% \noindent\hrulefill\vfill\null%^^A----------------------------------------
-%
-%
-% \subsection{The Interface for the Production of PDF Reprints}
-%
-% A reprint of an article can be produced in PDF format. To
-% accomplish this the package \texttt{dtk-pdf} is provided. This
-% package makes provisions to produce an appropriate header and
-% typeset the address information at the end.
-%
-% To use the package you can use a driver file with the following
-% structure:
-%
-% \begin{quote}
-% \verb|\documentclass{dtk}|\\
-% \texttt{\textit{preamble for article}}\\
-% \verb|\usepackage{dtk-pdf}|\\
-% \verb|\renewcommand\Volume{|\texttt{\textit{volume}}\verb|}|\\
-% \verb|\renewcommand\Pages{|\texttt{\textit{pages}}\verb|}|\\
-% \verb|\begin{document}|\\
-% \verb|\input{|\texttt{\textit{tex\_file}}\verb|}|\\
-% \verb|\Address|\\
-% \verb|\end{document}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% Here \texttt{\textit{preamble for article}} should be replaced by
-% the document preamble required for the production of the article.
-% \texttt{\textit{volume}} is the volume of ``Die \TeX nische
-% Kom\"odie'' in which the article has been published originally.
-% \texttt{\textit{pages}} is the range of pages on which is has
-% been published. Finally the article itself is included. This
-% assumes that the article---without preamble---is contained in a
-% file by its own.
-%
-%
-%
-%
-%
-% \section{Notes on the Production of the Journal}
-%
-% Several problems have to be solved for the production os the
-% whole journal. This section collects some of them and shows which
-% roads have been taken.
-%
-% \subsection{References}
-% References are done in \LaTeX\ with \verb|\label| and
-% \verb|\ref|. Since several articles are collected in the
-% complete journal it may happen that the same label is used in
-% different articles. To avoid name clashes the definitions of
-% \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| have been modified to prepend a
-% unique prefix.
-%
-% To enable you to make references across articles the original
-% definitions of \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| have been saved in
-% \verb|\Label| and \verb|\Ref| respectively.
-%
-%
-% \subsection{List of Authors}
-% The list of authors is collected for the whole journal. This list
-% is sorted alphabetically. To automate this process the names are
-% written to the index file and makeindex is used to perform the
-% sorting. Thus it is necessary for the complete journal to be run
-% through \LaTeX, makeindex, and \LaTeX\ again.
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Bibliography}
-% The bibliography is prepared with \BibTeX. Since several articles
-% are compiled we assume that the single articles are processed
-% separately before. During this processing \BibTeX\ can be used to
-% generate the appropriate bbl file.
-% Things are arranged to include the bbl file for the article in
-% question.
-%
-% One problem is not solved. This is the uniqueness of the \BibTeX\
-% labels. Here manual invention is required.
-%
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-% \newpage
-% \if@undefined\environment
-% \newenvironment{environment}[1]{}{}
-% \fi
-%
-%
-% \section{The Version Information}
-%
-% The following lines define the version information for the class
-% and the pdf package file.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class|pdf|logos>
-\def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2}
-\def\filename{dtk.dtx}
-\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $}
-\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $}
-\let\docversion=\fileversion
-\let\docdate=\filedate
-%</class|pdf|logos>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{The Documentation Driver}
-%
-% The documentation driver changes dtk.dtx into a self-extracting
-% documentation. Thus it is possible to run \LaTeX{} on dtk.dtx to
-% produce the documentation.
-%
-% The documentation can be adapted in a file named dtk.dcf
-% (documentation configuration). This file can contain instructions
-% for \verb|docstrip|. Especially useful might be the instruction
-%
-% \verb|\OnlyDescription|
-%
-% which supresses the generation of the implementation description.
-%
-% \changes{1.3}{1997/01/27}{The documentation driver has been
-% integrated.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\usepackage{dtklogos}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Modify the behaviour of \verb|ltxdoc|. Those settings can be
-% overwritten with local settings afterwards.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RecordChanges
-\EnableCrossrefs
-\CodelineIndex
-\setcounter{IndexColumns}2
-\setlength{\parskip}{.5ex}
-\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Local configurations can be made in \verb|dtk.dcf|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\InputIfFileExists{dtk.dcf}{}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Define some logos.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Ready to read the dtx file.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeleteShortVerb{|}
-\DocInput{dtk.dtx}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We want to see the change log.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newpage
-\PrintChanges
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% An index is highly desirable.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newpage
-\PrintIndex
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% That's it.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{The Implementation}
-%
-%
-% The implementation is mainly based on existing styles/classes. This file
-% contains only adaptions required to provide the logical markup
-% and the definitions to get the special layout of ``Die \TeX
-% nische Kom\"odie''.
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Basic Definitions}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we need a boolean to see if we are in the author version or
-% in the full version. The author version has several commands
-% disabled. The full version is turned on by giving the option
-% \verb|full| to the documentclass/style command.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTK@Author@
-\DTK@Author@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% ???
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTK@Draft@
-\newif\ifDTK@lineno@
-\DTK@lineno@false
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The boolean \verb|DTK@german@| is used to determine if the german
-% package should be loaded automatically. Usually it is turned on.
-% Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to load other
-% packages before the german package. Thus this variable can be set
-% via a package option.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifDTK@german@
-\DTK@german@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Compatibility Definitions}
-%
-% Since we want to use this style with \LaTeX\,2.09 and \LaTeXe{} we have
-% to define a common interface. For this purpose we use a subset of
-% the style writers interface already defined for \LaTeXe{} style
-% writers. Since some macros are not defined in \LaTeX\,2.09 we
-% implement them --- at least to the degree needed here.
-%
-% Starting with release 1.4 the backward compatibility may not work
-% any longer. It will be eliminated in a future release.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\documentclass\@undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
-% The macro \verb|RequirePackage| simply tries to load the appropriate
-% style file. The category code of \verb|@| is changed temporarily.
-% The old value is is saved in \verb|\DTK@cat| and restored at the end.
-%
-% Optional arguments are not supported, yet.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand\RequirePackage[1]{
- \chardef\DTK@cat=\the\catcode`\@
- \catcode`\@=11
- \input{#1.sty}%
- \catcode`\@=\DTK@cat}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LoadClass}
-% The concept of class and package files has not been so different in
-% \LaTeX\,2.09. Thus the same that has been said for \verb|\RequirePackage|
-% holds also for the macro \verb|\LoadClass|. Thus we just make it a
-% synonym.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\LoadClass=\RequirePackage
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists}
-% Now things get a little bit more complicated. To implement the
-% macro \verb|\InputIfFileExists| we try to open the file. If this
-% fails we assume that the file does not exist. The appropriate
-% action is performed in both cases.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand\InputIfFileExists[3]{%
- \openin\DTK@file #1
- \ifeof\DTK@file\closein\DTK@file #3%
- \else\closein\DTK@file #2\input{#1}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
-% The options in \LaTeX\,2.09 are defined as special named
-% macros. This is emulated here. The star variant is simply mapped
-% to do nothing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand\DeclareOption{\@ifstar{\@gobble}{\DTK@DeclareOption}}
- \newcommand\DTK@DeclareOption[2]{\@namedef{ds@#1}{#2}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions}
-% In \LaTeX\,2.09 the options are processed automatically. Thus
-% this macro is simply a noop.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\ProcessOptions=\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\OptionNotUsed}
-% This feature is not present in \LaTeX\,2.09. Thus the argument is
-% silently absorbed and the macro is simply a noop.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\OptionNotUsed=\gobble
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesClass}
-% This declaration is used to type out the version information.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\ProvidesClass#1[#2]{\typeout{Document Style #1 #2}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Just for fun we define some font switching commands. In fact the
-% behaviour in \LaTeXe{} is more complex. But I think these
-% definitions are enough to avoid errors.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand\emph[1]{{\em #1}\/}
- \newcommand\textbf[1]{{\bf #1}}
- \newcommand\textrm[1]{{\rm #1}}
- \newcommand\textsc[1]{{\sc #1}}
- \newcommand\textsf[1]{{\sf #1}}
- \newcommand\textsl[1]{{\sl #1\/}}
- \newcommand\textit[1]{{\it #1\/}}
- \newcommand\texttt[1]{{\tt #1}}
-
- \@ifundefined{fontshape}{\let\fontshape=\@gobble}{}
- \@ifundefined{selectfont}{\let\selectfont=\relax}{}
-
- \newcommand\providescommand[2]{\ifx#1\@undefined\newcommand#1{#2}\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We need a new handle to read files. This handle will be used to
-% implement \verb|\InputIfFileExists|. Since \verb|\newread| is
-% declared \verb|\outer| we have to allocate the new handle here. It is
-% just used in the \LaTeX\,2.09 mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newread\DTK@file
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we can continue without considering the \LaTeX{} dialect any
-% more. Any changes we make from now on are exclusivly based on the
-% interface defined above.
-%
-% This is all we had to do to implement the compatibility mode. It might
-% turn out that more features are desirable. Those extensions are left to
-% future versions of this class, eh sorry, style.
-%
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Initializations}
-%
-%
-% Now we can start to define the class. The version date is taken
-% from the macro \verb|\filedate|. This macro is defined at the
-% beginning of this file. The value is changed by the version
-% control system RCS.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/21}{File version added to class identifier.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesClass{dtk}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% ???
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% RN 2005-01-15, siehe `bibtopic.sty'.
-\newcommand\DTK@isnum[1]{%
- \if!\ifnum9<1#1!\else_\fi
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi
-}
-% RN 2005-01-31
-\newcommand*\DTK@@thelinenumber{\thepage-\arabic{linenumber}}
-%%%%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The options to switch to other point sizes are disabled. Nobody
-% is supposed to use this class with another than the single design
-% size.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{10pt}{\OptionNotUsed}
-\DeclareOption{11pt}{\OptionNotUsed}
-\DeclareOption{12pt}{\OptionNotUsed}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The options to switch the oneside and twoside settings are
-% disabled. Nobody is supposed to use this class with another than
-% the single design size.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{twoside}{\OptionNotUsed}
-\DeclareOption{oneside}{\OptionNotUsed}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We define an internal style option ``full''. This loads
-% the multicolumn package from the Mainz distribution. It is only
-% needed to produce the full journal. Additionally several macros
-% are only defined in the full version. This makes sure that authors can
-% not play with too much internal macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{full}{\DTK@Author@false}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The package option \verb|omitgerman| can be used to omit the
-% loading of the package \verb|german.sty|. This migth be necessary
-% if packages are required which have to be loaded before
-% \verb|german|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{omitgerman}{\DTK@german@false}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% In 1996 the layout of ``Die TeXnische Kom\"odie'' has been
-% changed. The option \verb|ancient| can be used to switch back to
-% the old layout.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{ancient}{\def\DTK@layout{95}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% ???
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% RN 2005-01-16
-\DeclareOption{draft}{%
- \DTK@Draft@true
- \DTK@lineno@true
- \PassOptionsToPackage{pagewise}{lineno}%
- \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}%
-}
-% RN 2005-01-30
-\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{\DTK@lineno@true}
-\DeclareOption{nolinenumbers}{\DTK@lineno@false}
-\DeclareOption{pagewise}{%
- \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}}
-\DeclareOption{running}{%
- \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}}
-% RN 2005-01-31
-% RN/HjG 2005-02-11
-% Ein grauenvoller Hack!
-\DeclareOption{ln-long}{\def\DTK@@thelinenumber{%
- %\def\Hugo{%
- \ifoddNumberedPage% eigtl. Even!!!
- \ifodd\c@page
- \@tempswatrue %C
- \else
- \@tempswafalse %D
- \fi
- \else
- \ifodd\c@page
- \@tempswafalse %A
- \else
- \@tempswatrue %B
- \fi
- \fi
- %}\Hugo
- %\@tempcnta=\c@page
- %\if@tempswa \advance\@tempcnta\@ne \fi
- \if@tempswa \advance\c@page\@ne \fi
- %\edef\thepage{\the\@tempcnta}%
- \thepage-\arabic{linenumber}}}
-\DeclareOption{ln-short}{\def\DTK@@thelinenumber{%
- \arabic{linenumber}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% ??? Now done better!
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\iffalse% RN 2005-01-15
-\DeclareOption{95}{\def\DTK@layout{95}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{96}{\def\DTK@layout{96}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{97}{\def\DTK@layout{97}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{98}{\def\DTK@layout{98}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{99}{\def\DTK@layout{99}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Option for 2000 added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{00}{\def\DTK@layout{00}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/23}{Option for 2001 added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{01}{\def\DTK@layout{01}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/10/04}{Option for 2002 added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{02}{\def\DTK@layout{02}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The remaining options are handed down to the base class \verb|book|.
-% This works for \LaTeXe{} and is a noop for \LaTeX\,2.09.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% ??? This is the way \dots!
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
-\DeclareOption*{%
- \DTK@isnum{\CurrentOption}%
- {\edef\DTK@layout{\CurrentOption}}%
- {\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}}%
-}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we can process all options. Again this works for \LaTeXe{}
-% and is a noop for \LaTeX\,2.09 since the options are
-% automatically processed there.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProcessOptions
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Loading the Used Packages/Styles}
-%
-% This class is a variation of the \verb|book| class. Thus
-% we load the base class. This loading is done with the macro from
-% the interface definition or the built-in \LaTeXe{} primitive.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\LoadClass{book}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% ???
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% RN 2005-01-30
-\ifDTK@lineno@
- \RequirePackage{lineno}\linenumbers
- \RequirePackage{color}%
- \linenumbersep=.8ex
- \def\linenumberfont{\normalfont\scriptsize\sffamily\bfseries}%
- \definecolor{DTK@lineno@color}{cmyk}{0.26,0,0.76,0}% SpringGreen
- \def\thelinenumber{%
- \begingroup
- \fboxsep=.3ex\fcolorbox{black}{DTK@lineno@color}{%
- \DTK@@thelinenumber}%
- \endgroup}%
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The T1 font encoding is used.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{T1 font encoding enabled.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% ???
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% RN 2005-01-15
-\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\RequirePackage{lmodern}}{}
-\RequirePackage[full]{textcomp}
-% RN/HjG 2005-03-23
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc}
-\fi
-\usepackage[hyphens]{url}
-\usepackage[newcommands,newparameters]{ragged2e}
-\@ifundefined{flushleft}
- {\let\flushleft\FlushLeft\let\endflushleft\endFlushLeft}{}
-%
-\usepackage{filecontents}
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For old issues of the journal the OT1 font encoding is used
-% instead.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998>
-\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc}
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The package ``\texttt{ngerman}'' is used since this class is
-% intended to be used by german users mainly. As one result the
-% language is set to german as default. On the other side some
-% parameters are modified to get a layout according to german
-% habits. E.g. fench spacing is activated.
-%
-% There are some known problems when (n)german.sty is used. Therefore
-% it might turn out necessary to load (n)german.sty after other
-% packages have been loaded. For this purpose the option
-% |omitgerman| can be used. To ensure proper operation of dtk it is
-% necesary to call the macro \verb|\DTKgerman| after the style
-% (n)german has been loaded.
-%
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/03}{The package ngerman is used to support
-% the current orthography.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@german@
-\RequirePackage{ngerman}
-\selectlanguage{ngerman}
-\else
-\typeout{*** Warning: Loading of (n)german has been omitted. You have to
- load it manually.}
-\typeout{*** Don't forget to use the macro \string\DTKgerman\space
- afterwards.}
-\fi
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-\ifDTK@german@
-\RequirePackage{german}
-\selectlanguage{german}
-\fi
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The package ``\texttt{multicol}'' is used in the full version. Thus
-% we only load it if the option \verb|full| has been given.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Packages graphicx and color are required.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% RN 2005-01-22
-% Mindestens `multicol' wird auch im Autormodus gebraucht, falls dort
-% ein Index erstellt wird. Vermutlich "graphicx,color" ("xcolor"?) auch
-% so allemeing\"ultig, dass es vorgezogen werden sollte!
-\RequirePackage{multicol}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
-% \RequirePackage{multicol}
- \RequirePackage{graphicx,color}
-% RN 2005-01-22
- \errorcontextlines=100\relax
-\fi
-\RequirePackage{dtklogos}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\NeedPackage}
-% \changes{1.3}{1997/01/29}{Macro added.}
-% This macro can be used to declare in a single article which
-% packages are required. At this places it is too late to load
-% them if they are not loaded already. In stead a fat message is
-% presented which warns the user of potential problems.
-%
-% This macro takes a single argument which is the name of
-% \emph{one} package. Multiple packages and versions are not
-% supported (yet).
-%
-% This macro is copied and modified from an \LaTeX2\ (june 1996)
-% internal. It seems as \LaTeXe\ defines a control sequences for
-% each package which is loaded. This mechanism is exploited.
-%
-% Since older versions of \LaTeX\ do not support this mechanism
-% warning are reported even so everything is ok.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\NeedPackage[1]{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@#1.sty\endcsname\relax
- \typeout{***}%
- \typeout{***}%
- \typeout{*** The required package `#1' seems not to be loaded.}%
- \typeout{*** I try to stumble along as good as I can.}%
- \typeout{*** Expect some undefined macros or other errors.}%
- \typeout{***}%
- \typeout{***}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Layout Parameters}
-%
-% The layout can be influenced by a large number of
-% parameters. Thus the design decisions have been made transparent
-% (to a certain degree at least). These options are not meant to be
-% changed except when a new layout is being designed and implemented.
-%
-%
-% The size of the paper is A5. Thus the paper dimensions are defined
-% appropriately.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\paperwidth = 148.5mm
-\paperheight = 210mm
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{New page dimensions for 1/2000.}
-% The height is set to 471\,pt; the width is 342pt.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\textheight = 471pt
-\textwidth = 333pt
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The height is set to 484\,pt = 170.10654\,mm; the
-% width is 342\,pt = 120.19925\,mm. This is slightly larger than in the
-% predecessor style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-\textheight = 484pt
-\textwidth = 342pt
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The page is flushed left. A left margin of one inch is the default
-% on any properly installed printer. Any adjustment of the
-% printable area on the page is left to the output driver.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\oddsidemargin = 0pt
-\evensidemargin = \oddsidemargin\oddsidemargin -35.89157pt
-\evensidemargin -17.70235pt
-\topmargin -55.66684pt
-%\topmargin = 0pt% RN 2005-01-16
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The head line needs some space. In fact this depends on some
-% configurable macros. Nevertheless we take the old values and
-% leave it to a user to change those values if required.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\headheight = 17pt
-\headsep = 17pt
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\headheight = 14pt
-\headsep = 12pt
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The foot line needs some space. The same remarks given above
-% apply here too.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\footskip = 24pt
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\footskip = 21pt
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Paragraphs are not indented but separated by additional lead
-% only. This lead may expand a little bit but it may not
-% shrink. (Since the whole journal is typeset with raggedbottom it
-% is not clear to me if this makes sense at all)
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\parskip = 0.5\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt
-\parindent = 0pt
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% To reduce the probability that a float requires a complete page
-% we increase the allowed fraction which can be occupied by floats
-% at the top and the bottom of the page. Additionally we reduce the
-% fraction required for text.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\topfraction{.9}
-\renewcommand\bottomfraction{.9}
-\renewcommand\textfraction{.1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/21}{columnsep reduced to 5pt}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\columnsep = 5pt
-%</class>
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-\columnsep = 10pt
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/24}{emergencystretch set to 1.5em.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\emergencystretch = 1.5em
-%</class>
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999|2000>
-\emergencystretch = 0pt
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999|2000>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% As promised before we disable vertical adjustment of pages. This
-% seems to be a good strategy to avoid ragged apearance by too much
-% space between paragraphs.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\raggedbottom
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% To avoid a bad layout we adjust some parameters. Thus we try to
-% avoid widows and clubs.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\clubpenalty = 10000
-\widowpenalty = 10000
-% \end{macrocode}
-% ???
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% RN 2005-01-16 ???
-\marginparwidth=1cm
-%\marginparsep=\z@
-\@ifdefinable\DTK@orig@marginpar{\let\DTK@orig@marginpar\marginpar}
-\renewcommand*\marginpar{%
- \ClassWarning{dtk}{Command `\string\marginpar' not expected}%
- \DTK@orig@marginpar}
-%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DTKgerman}
-% We will change some of the captions names used within \LaTeX{}. To avoid
-% that the package ``\texttt{german}'' undoes our efforts we anchor the
-% changes in the \verb|\captionsgerman| macro. To do so we have to save the
-% old meaning in an internal name.
-% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/24}{Method for ngerman added}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\DTKgerman{
- \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman
- \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman
- \@ifundefined{l@ngerman}{}{\selectlanguage{ngerman}}%
-}
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-\renewcommand\DTKgerman{
- \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman
- \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman
- \selectlanguage{german}%
-}
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DTK@captionsgerman}
-%
-% Now we can redefine the captions command. First of all we use the
-% old definition. Thus we avoid duplicating the whole definition
-% and maybe getting in trouble with some future version.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\DTK@captionsgerman{
- \DTK@captionsgerman
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\refname}
-% Just in case that an article contains a list of references we
-% define the title for this section.
-% Well, in fact we assume that the \LaTeX{} used is not too
-% ancient. Otherwise this will not work properly.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \gdef\refname{Literatur}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bibname}
-% Ok. And now the same trick for the title of the bibliography.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \gdef\bibname{Literatur}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\contentsname}
-% The headline for the table of contents is defined appropriately.
-% \verb|\volume| contains the number of the current volume. This
-% number is set by the macro producing the front page.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \gdef\contentsname{Inhalt Heft \Volume}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we are done. We just have to make sure that the new values
-% are activated by calling the new captions macros.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% If the option german has been loaded automatically then we have
-% to modify the captions at once. Otherwise the user is responsible
-% to call \verb|\DTKgerman| after the package german has been loaded.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@german@
- \DTKgerman
-\fi
-%</class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-\ifDTK@german@
- \DTKgerman
-\fi
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\addressname}
-% The heading for the list of authors is defined in this macro.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\addressname{Autoren/Organisatoren}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\journalname}
-% The name of the journal is stored in this macro. This should make
-% it easier to use this class for other purposes than typesetting
-% ``Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie''. It is not the primary intention to
-% support this but some attempts have been made to use this class
-% for other publications.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Macro introduced.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\journalname{Die \TeX nische Kom{\"o}die}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\volume}
-% The number of the current volume is stored in this macro. The
-% value is automatically set with the macro
-% \verb|\DieTeXnischeKomoedie|. Since this macro is usually only
-% used in the full version we provide a reasonable default.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Current date and time added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\Volume{?/??}
-\newcommand\volume{\Volume\ --- Entwurf \today\
- \begingroup
- \count1=\time\divide\count1 60
- \count2=\count1 \multiply\count2 -60 \advance\count2\time
- \ifnum\count1<10 0\fi\the\count1:\ifnum\count2<10 0\fi\the\count2
- \endgroup
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% ???
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% RN 2005-01-17
-\newcommand*\DTK@corr@version{}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \newcommand*\DTK@today{}%
- \begingroup
- \count@\time
- \divide\count@ 60\relax
- \count2=-\count@
- \multiply\count2 60\relax
- \advance\count2 \time
- %% \loggingall %% Wuduh!
- \xdef\DTK@today{%
- \the\year-\two@digits{\the\month}-\two@digits{\the\day}% %!!! \the
- %\protect~% Warum geht das nicht?
- \noexpand\noexpand~%
- %% Wuduh! 2 \noexpand noetig? Weil \number\the 2mal zuschlaegt?
- %% Ohne \the langt 1 \noexpand!
- \two@digits{\the\count@}:\two@digits{\the\count2}}%
- %%\show\DTK@today
- \endgroup
- \ifDTK@Draft@
- \def\DTK@corr@version{\fbox{Korrekturversion:~\DTK@today}}%
- \AtEndOfClass{%
- \let\ps@empty=\ps@plain
- \let\ps@part=\ps@plain}%
- \else
- \let\@LN\@gobbletwo% Wegen .aux-Datei von vorherigem lineno-Lauf
- \let\@LN@col\@gobble
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\footmark}
-% This macro contains the text of the running foot.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\footmark{\journalname\ \volume}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ChapterFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typesetting a chapter title.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\ChapterFont{\Large\sf}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\ChapterFont{\Large\bf}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SectionFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typesetting the section heading.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\SectionFont{\large\sf}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\SectionFont{\normalsize\bf}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SubsectionFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typesetting the subsection heading.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\SubsectionFont{\normalsize\sf}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\SubsectionFont{\normalsize\it}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SubsubsectionFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typesetting the subsubsection heading and below.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\SubsubsectionFont{\normalsize\sf}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\SubsubsectionFont{\normalsize\it}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AuthorFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typeseting the author of an article.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\AuthorFont{\large\sf}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\AuthorFont{\normalsize\rm}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TitleFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typeseting the title of an article.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\TitleFont{\Large\sf}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\TitleFont{\large\bf}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\HeadFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typeseting the running head line.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\HeadFont{\sf\fontshape{sl}\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\HeadFont{\sl}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FootFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typeseting the running foot line.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\FootFont{\footnotesize\sf\fontshape{sl}\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\FootFont{\footnotesize\sl}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\PagenoFont}
-% This macro contains the font changing command issued before
-% typeseting the page number.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\PagenoFont{\sf}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\PagenoFont{\rm}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\NewpageThreshold}
-% The macro \verb|\NewpageThreshold| is used to determine how much
-% space is needed on a page to start a new article. If less space
-% is left then the next article is started on the next page.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\NewpageThreshold{100pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\HeadRuleDepth}
-% This macro contains the depth of the line between the running
-% head and the main body of text.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\HeadRuleDepth{0pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\HeadRuleDepth{0.1pt}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FootRuleDepth}
-% This macro contains the depth of the line between the running
-% foot and the main body of text.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\FootRuleDepth{0pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\FootRuleDepth{0.1pt}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ContentsParSkip}
-% This macro contains the \verb|parskip| used for the table of
-% contents.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\ContentsParSkip{1pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Size Changing Commands and Mathematics}
-%
-% The size changing commands \verb|\small| and \verb|\footnotesize|
-% redefine also \verb|\@listi|. This effect has to be undone.
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DTK@math}
-% This macro modifies the relavant parameters for typesetting
-% mathematics.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\DTK@math{%
- \abovedisplayskip = 4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \belowdisplayskip = \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip = 2pt plus 2pt
- \belowdisplayshortskip = \abovedisplayshortskip
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@normalsize}
-% This is an internal size changing command. We save the old
-% definition in \verb|\DTK@@normalsize| and redefine it. After the
-% old definition is used some sizes are changed to a smaller value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\DTK@@normalsize=\@normalsize
-\def\@normalsize{%
- \DTK@@normalsize
- \DTK@math
- \let\@listi=\@listI}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\normalsize}
-% This is a size changing command. We save the old
-% definition in the macro \verb|\DTK@normalsize| and redefine
-% it. After the old definition is used some sizes are changed to a
-% smaller value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\DTK@normalsize=\normalsize
-\renewcommand\normalsize{%
- \DTK@normalsize
- \DTK@math
- \let\@listi=\@listI}
-\normalsize
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\small}
-% This is a size changing command. We save the old
-% definition in \verb|\DTK@small| and redefine it. After the
-% old definition is used some sizes are changed to a smaller value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\DTK@small=\small
-\renewcommand\small{%
- \DTK@small
- \DTK@math
- \let\@listi=\@listI}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize}
-% This is a size changing command. We save the old
-% definition in the macro \verb|\DTK@footnotesize| and redefine
-% it. After the old definition is used some sizes are changed to a
-% smaller value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\DTK@footnotesize=\footnotesize
-\renewcommand\footnotesize{%
- \DTK@footnotesize
- \DTK@math
- \let\@listi=\@listI}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Path}
-% \changes{1.3}{1997/01/28}{Macro added.}
-% This macro can be used to typeset paths to network sources like
-% ftp directories or URLs as well as email addresses. The argument
-% is typeset in a teletype font. Underscores and tildes are treated
-% as ordinary characters. Linebreaking is enabled after certain
-% special characters without inserting a hyphen.
-%
-% Unfortunately this macro is fragile.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
-\gdef\Path@SepI{/""}
-\gdef\Path@SepII{\symbol{92}""}
-\gdef\Path@SepIII{:""}
-\catcode`\/=13
-\catcode`\:=13
-\catcode`\^=0
-^catcode`\\=13
-^gdef^Path{^begingroup
- ^catcode`^/=13
- ^catcode`^\=13
- ^catcode`^:=13
- ^catcode`^~=12
- ^catcode`^$=12 %$
- ^catcode`^_=12
- ^catcode`^#=12
- ^let/=^Path@SepI
- ^let\=^Path@SepII
- ^let:=^Path@SepIII
- ^@Path}
-^gdef^@Path#1{^texttt{#1}^endgroup}
-^endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Logical Markup}
-%
-% One of the advantages of \LaTeX\ is the possiblity to use logical
-% markup. For this purpose several markup macros are provided.
-% Unfortunately the macros provided are not sufficient in several
-% situations. Thus this class provides some additional markup
-% macros to come closer to the ideal situation.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\File}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting file names.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\File[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Package}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting package names.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Package[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Program}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting program names.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Program[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Command}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting command names.
-% For instance command names are relevant when talking about Unix
-% commands.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Command[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Macro}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting macro names.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Macro[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Environment}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting environment names.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Environment[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Email}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting email addresses.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Email[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CTANurl}
-%% hv 2006-08-11
-% Use this macro instead of \verb+\url+ for references to the \CTAN.
-% It uses the \verb+\href+ and \verb+\nolinkurl+ from the package \Package{hyperref}
-% or alternative the \Package{url} and an empty \Command{href}, if hyprref isn't loaded.
-% An example for a reference is \verb+\CTANurl{graphics/pstricks/}+: \CTANurl{graphics/pstricks/}
-\providecommand*{\nolinkurl}{\url}
-\providecommand*{\href}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\CTANurl}[1]{%
- \href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1}}%
-}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Acronym}
-% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting acronyms. It is
-% highly recommended to use this macro sparsingly
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Acronym[1]{\textsc{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{List Making Environments}
-%
-% The list making environments \verb|description|, \verb|itemize|,
-% and \verb|enumerate| are adapted to use less vertical space. This
-% is mainly done by resetting \verb|\parsep|, \verb|\itemsep|, and
-% \verb|\topsep|.
-%
-% The environments \verb|itemize| and \verb|enumerate| use the
-% macros \verb|@listi|, \verb|@listii|, etc. Thus it is sufficient
-% to redefine those macros.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listI{%
- \leftmargin = \leftmargini
- \parsep = \parskip
- \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@listi=\@listI
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listii{%
- \leftmargin = \leftmarginii
- \labelwidth = \leftmarginii
- \advance \labelwidth by-\labelsep
- \parsep = \parskip
- \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@listiii{%
- \leftmargin = \leftmarginiii
- \labelwidth = \leftmarginiii
- \advance \labelwidth by-\labelsep
- \partopsep = 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt
- \parsep = \parskip
- \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We activate the defaults.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@listi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For some reason \verb|@listi| is redefined in \verb|small| and
-% \verb|\footnotesize|. Thus we have to take care to undo the
-% changes made there. For this purpose we save the old definitions
-% and restore the intended meaning of \verb|\@listi| after calling
-% the old macro.
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\circ$}
-\renewcommand\labelitemii{$\m@th\triangleright$}
-\renewcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\diamond$}
-\setlength\leftmargini{1.5em}
-\setlength\leftmarginii{1.4em}
-\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.3em}
-\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.2em}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\bullet$}
-\renewcommand\labelitemii{\bf --}
-\renewcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\ast$}
-\setlength\leftmargini{2.5em}
-\setlength\leftmarginii{2.2em}
-\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.87em}
-\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.7em}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{description}
-% To get things smaller we completely redefine the description
-% environment. Nevertheless we make use of the old label formatting
-% macro.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewenvironment{description}{%
- \begin{list}{}{%
- \labelwidth = 0pt
- \itemindent = -\leftmargin
- \parsep = \parskip
- \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \let\makelabel=\descriptionlabel}%
- }{\end{list}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{descriptionlabel}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{%
- \hspace\labelsep{\normalsize\it #1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{quotation}
-% Since the whole journal does not use parindent we make the
-% quotation environment the same as the quote environment.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
- \list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
- \item\relax
-}{\endlist}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
- \list{}{\listparindent 1.5em
- \itemindent\listparindent
- \rightmargin\leftmargin\parsep \z@ plus\p@}%
- \item\relax
-}{\endlist}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{roll}
-% We add a new type of list making environment. The \verb|roll|
-% does not indent per default but just typesets the argument of the
-% \verb|\item| macro in boldface. It has one optional argument
-% which can be used to specify the amount of indentation desired.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{roll}%
- {\@ifnextchar[{\r@ll}{\r@ll[0pt]}}%
- {\end{list}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\r@ll[#1]{\begin{list}{}{%
- \labelwidth = #1
- \leftmargin = \labelwidth
- \itemsep = .3ex
- \let\makelabel=\rolllabel}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% Typeset the label of a \verb|roll| environment.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\rolllabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \textbf{#1}\hfill}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \begin{environment}{example}
-% We provide an environment for typesetting example code.
-% It is typeset in a smaller font with an indentation left and right.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{example}{\begin{quote}\small}{\end{quote}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-%
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname
- ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname
- the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \small
- \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
- \endgroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Sectioning Commands}
-%
-%
-% The counter \verb|secnumdepth| determines which sectional units
-% are decorated with a number. Since we don't want sections and
-% everything below to be numbered we set this counter to 0.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% All but the first article are separated by additional vertical
-% space from the preceding text. Thus we define a new boolean
-% variable to determine which article is the first one in a chapter.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifFirstArticle
-\FirstArticletrue
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\part}
-% This definition is used in the author version, where \verb|\part|
-% should not be used. An error message is issued instead.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \renewcommand\part{%
- \typeout{*** Parts can not be used in single articles.}}
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% A part is aligned to the next full page. A special page style is
-% used on a first page of a part. The macro \verb|\part| has one
-% ordinary argument which constitutes the main title of the part.
-% This argument can be preceeded by an optional argument---enclosed
-% in brackets. This first optional argument is used as the running
-% head. If it is missing the main title is used instead.
-%
-% The main argument can be followed by another optional argument.
-% This second optional argument is the subtitle of the part.
-% If none is given then the empty default is used instead.
-% The second optional argument is an enhancement compared to the
-% original definition of parts in \LaTeX.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \renewcommand\part{%
- \clearpage
- \thispagestyle{part}%
- \FirstArticletrue
- \Advance@Label@Prefix
- \@ifstar{\part@star{chapter}}{\part@star{part}}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\part@star}
-% If the next character is a \verb|[| then the part macro has an
-% optional argument.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\part@star[1]{%
- \@ifnextchar[{\part@optional{#1}}{\part@normal{#1}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\part@optional}
-% This macro treats the case that the part macro has an optional
-% argument. This optional argument is used in the running head and
-% the table of contents.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\part@optional#1[#2]#3{%
- \markboth{#2}{#2}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{#2}%
- \@ifnextchar[{\part@subtitle{#3}}{\part@nosubtitle{#3}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\part@normal}
-% This macro treats the case that the part has no optional
-% argument. In this case the title itself is used in the head and
-% in the table of contents.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\part@normal[2]{%
- \markboth{#2}{#2}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{#2}%
- \@ifnextchar[{\part@subtitle{#2}}{\part@nosubtitle{#2}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\part@subtitle}
-% This macro treats the case that the part has an optional
-% argument for a subtitle.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\part@subtitle#1[#2]{\TopArt{#1}{\\#2}\bigskip\par}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\part@nosubtitle}
-% This macro treats the case that the part has no optional
-% argument for a subtitle.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\part@nosubtitle[1]{\TopArt{#1}{}\bigskip\par}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TopArt}
-% This macro is used to generate the layout of the beginning of a
-% part. It takes two arguments. The first argument is the title of
-% the part and the second argument is its subtitle. If the subtitle
-% is not empty then it is started by \verb|\\|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\TopArtRule{2pt}
-\newcommand\TopArt[2]{%
- \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\parskip=0pt\parindent=0pt
- \null\vspace{18pt}\par\raggedright\large\sf
- {\huge\sf #1}\\[-.5ex]\rule{\textwidth}{\TopArtRule}%
- \vspace{2pt} #2
- \end{minipage}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\TopArt[2]{%
- \begingroup
- \unitlength = 1pt
- \@tempcnta = \textwidth
- \divide\@tempcnta by \unitlength
- \framebox(\@tempcnta,38){\parbox{.95\textwidth}{%
- \begin{center}{\large\bf #1}#2 \end{center}}}
- \endgroup}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
-% In the author version of this class no chapters are allowed. They
-% are activated when the option \verb|full| is given to the
-% class/style. Otherwise an error message is printed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \renewcommand\chapter{%
- \typeout{*** Chapters can not be used in single articles.}}
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The appearance of a chapter is the same as the appearance of a
-% section. Additionally a line is added to the table of contents
-% and the headline is set appropriately.
-%
-% Since we want to deal with optional arguments and star variants
-% things are becoming a little bit more complicated. I don't know
-% if it is worth the effort. Maybe nobody will ever use this
-% feature anyhow.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \renewcommand\chapter{%
- \@ifnextchar*{\chapter@star}{%
- \@ifnextchar[{\chapter@optional}{\chapter@normal}}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Ignore any number of stars. Well this may be to harsh but I think
-% this is enough.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\chapter@star*{\chapter}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Provide a default for the optional argument.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\chapter@normal#1{\chapter@optional[#1]{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now do the whole job.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\chapter@optional[#1]{%
- \typeout{#1}%
- \Advance@Label@Prefix
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \markboth{#1}{#1}%
- \FirstArticletrue
- \@startsection{chapter}{0}{\z@}{-1ex plus-1ex minus
- -.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\ChapterFont}*%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\section}
-% The section is redefined to use less vertical space than the
-% original definition.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{%
- -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
-% The subsection is redefined to use less vertical space than the
-% original definition.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{%
- -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
-% The subsubsection is redefined to use less vertical space than
-% the original definition.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{%
- -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
-% The paragraph is redefined to use less vertical space than the
-% original definition.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{%
- 0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{%
- 1ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
-% The subparagraph is redefined to use less vertical space than the
-% original definition.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}%
- {\parindent}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}%
- {\parindent}{1ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{The Article Layout}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\keywords}
-% The macro \verb|keywords| is intended for the user to specify
-% keywords for the article. It is not used for the article itself
-% but for the reprint and the \BibTeX\ file of all articles.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\keywords[1]{\def\DTK@keywords{#1}}
-\def\DTK@keywords{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
-% The title of an article is typeset together with the author
-% information. If it is the first article in this chapter then
-% additional vertical space is added.
-%
-% The title is added to the table of contents and the headline is
-% adjusted appropriately.
-%
-% The macro \verb|\NewpageThreshold| is used to determine how much
-% space is needed aon a page to start a new article. If less space
-% is left then the next article is started on the next page.
-%
-% Now we can start to typeset the head of an article and perform
-% all tasks required in this situation.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\maketitle{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If we are not in a complete journal then we use a different page style
-% for the first page. Thus it is possible to use this class to typeset
-% preprints and get a better layout of the first page.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifDTK@Author@ \thispagestyle{part}\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we have to ensure that there is enough space left on this page to
-% start a new article. If there isn't enough space we start the article on
-% the next page.
-% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/25}{Bugfix: constant replaced by macro.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifdim\DTKtitle@skip>0pt\vspace{\DTKtitle@skip}\fi
- \begingroup
- \dimen0=\vsize
- \advance\dimen0 by -\pagetotal
- \ifdim\dimen0<\NewpageThreshold
- \newpage
- \global\FirstArticletrue
- \fi
- \endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The namespace for labels has to be switched. This is done by
-% calling the macro \verb|\Advance@Label@Prefix|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \Advance@Label@Prefix
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We encapsulate the title and author information in a minipage to avoid a
-% pagebreak in beween (maybe not necessary). Then we draw a line to
-% separate the article from the previous one. The line is required if the
-% boolean variable \verb|FirstArticle| is true. This variable is set
-% afterwards.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begingroup
- \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
- \ifFirstArticle
- \global\FirstArticlefalse
- \vskip 3pt
- \else
- \DTKtitle@sep
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \setcounter{footnote}0
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we insert the title and the author. The title is also put into the
-% table of contents. The running head is adjusted.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@flushglue=0pt plus .3\textwidth\relax
- \raggedright
- \TitleFont
- \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font\relax
- \xspaceskip=\fontdimen7\font\relax
- \@title
- \ifx\@author\@empty\else
- \bigskip\par
- \AuthorFont\@author
- \fi
- \end{minipage}%
- \@thanks
- \let\thanks\@gobble
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@title}%
- \markboth{\@title}{\@title}%
- \endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Finally we rest certain values and insert some space to the beginning of
-% the article.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\@title=\@empty
- \let\@author=\@empty
- \let\@thanks=\@empty
- \setcounter{figure}0
- \setcounter{table}0
- \setcounter{equation}0
-% \setcounter{footnote}0
- \medskip\par}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DTKtitle@skip}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\DTKtitle@skip{12pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\DTKtitle@skip{0pt}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DTKtitle@sep}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\DTKtitle@sep{\vspace{32pt plus 8pt minus 16pt}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\DTKtitle@sep{\rule{\textwidth}{.4pt}%
- \vskip 14pt plus 8pt minus 12pt}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% Several authors are separated by \verb|\and|. Here is a first
-% approximation to deal with this case.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\and{, }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We provide default values for the author, the title and the
-% footnote of the title. All of them are empty.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@title=\@empty
-\let\@author=\@empty
-\let\@thanks=\@empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{abstract}
-% The abstract is typeset in a smaller font indented left and right.
-% The use of the quote environment ensures that the abstract can be
-% broken at the end of the line.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newenvironment{abstract}{%
- \begin{quote}\small
- }{%
- \end{quote}\medskip\par}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Numbering}
-%
-% The numbering is done on a global basis. No chapter numbers are
-% prepended. Especially since none are used at all. This is just
-% like in the article class.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\thefigure{\arabic{figure}}
-\renewcommand\thetable{\arabic{table}}
-\renewcommand\theequation{\arabic{equation}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Labels}
-%
-% Labels have to be used on an per article basis for this purpose
-% we use a macro to hold the prefix for the labels. This prefix is
-% prepended whenever something is done with the labels.
-%
-% The prefix is constructed from a numeric counter. This counter is% allocated and initialized. Maybe I could live without this
-% counter but this way the labels look nicer (if you ever see them).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\DTL@label
-\DTL@label=0
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Advance@Label@Prefix}
-% This macro is expanded whenever a new module is entered. It has
-% to take care that a new and unique prefix string for the labels
-% is generated and stored in the macro \verb|\Label@Prefix|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\Advance@Label@Prefix{%
- \advance\DTL@label 1
- \xdef\Label@Prefix{module \the\DTL@label:}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The label prefix has to be initalized. The easiest way to perform
-% this task is touse the macro defined above.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\Advance@Label@Prefix
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Sometimes it is desirable to use labels in the old
-% sense. I.e. without the module system. For this purpose we keep
-% the old definitions of the macros \verb|\ref|, \verb|\label|, and
-% \verb|\pageref| under the new names \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Label|, and
-% \verb|\Pageref| respectivly.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\Ref=\ref
-\let\Label=\label
-\let\Pageref=\pageref
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ref}
-% The module prefix is prepended before the original \verb|\ref|
-% macros is used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\ref[1]{\Ref{\Label@Prefix:#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\label}
-% The module prefix is prepended before the original \verb|\label|
-% macros is used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\label[1]{\Label{\Label@Prefix:#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\pageref}
-% The module prefix is prepended before the original \verb|\pageref|
-% macros is used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\pageref[1]{\Pageref{\Label@Prefix:#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Bibliography}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\thebibliography}
-% Instead of using a \verb|\chapter*| to start a bibliography we
-% use a \verb|\section*|. Thus the bibliography should not appear
-% in the table of contents.
-% \changes{1.8}{2002/04/01}{typeset raggedright.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\thebibliography[1]{%
- \section*{\refname}%
- \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{%
- \settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%
- \leftmargin\labelwidth
- \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
- \usecounter{enumi}}
- \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}
- \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax\DTK@bibliography@rightskip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DTK@bibliography@rightskip}
-%
-% \changes{1.8}{2002/04/01}{macro added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\DTK@bibliography@rightskip{\rightskip=0pt plus 2em}
-%</class>
-%<*2002>
-\newcommand\DTK@bibliography@rightskip{}
-%</2002>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DTK@bibliography}
-% This macro is used to overwrite the macro \verb|\bibliography|
-% when the complete journal is typeset.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\DTK@bibliography[1]{
- \InputIfFileExists{#1.bbl}{}{\typeout{--- File #1.bbl not found.}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{1.3}{1997/01/28}{Forcing the bibstyle.}
-% We switch to the default bib style.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bibliographystyle{dtk}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Footnotes}
-%
-% This is just my personal taste. I have incorporated my
-% fnblock.sty. This style option arranges things in a way that
-% footnotes do not go beneath the footnotemarks. In addition they
-% can be indented at the right side.
-%
-% Both indentation at both sides can be configured with the
-% following two macros:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\DTK@fnrightmargin{0em}
-\newcommand\DTK@fnleftmargin{1em}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
-% And now we make the footnote to behave as desired.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Don't let footnote line and footnote
-% text be broken across pages. Fix problem with footnotemarks.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
- \@nobreaktrue
- \begin{list}{}{%
- \rightmargin=0pt%
- \parsep=0.333\baselineskip plus 2pt
- \leftmargin=\DTK@fnleftmargin}
- \item\mbox{}%
- \llap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}\kern1pt}%
- #1%
- \end{list}}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\noindent
- \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$}#1}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@textsuperscript}
-% Define \verb|\@textsuperscript| for older LaTeX(2e) versions.
-% The macros has been copied from ``latex.ltx'' <1999/12/01>.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Macro introduced to fix problems with
-% footnotes in minipages.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{@textsuperscript}{%
- \def\@textsuperscript#1{%
- {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
-% The rule separating main text and footnotes is defined.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
- \kern-3\p@
- \hrule\@width0.333\columnwidth
- \kern2.6\p@}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@
- \hrule width .4\columnwidth
- \kern 2.6\p@}
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Defining Page Styles}
-%
-% \subsubsection{The Page Style ``plain''}
-%
-% The page style plain provides a head line and a foot line. The
-% page number is printed in the outer corner of the head line. The
-% inner part of the head line contains the title of the current
-% article.
-%
-% The foot line contains the name and number of the current journal
-% flushed towards the inner border of the page.
-%
-% The head line and the footline are separated by a bar from the
-% main body of text.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\ps@plain{%
- \let\@mkboth=\@gobbletwo
- \let\chaptermark=\@gobble
- \let\sectionmark=\@gobble
- \let\subsectionmark=\@gobble
- \def\@oddhead{\vbox{\hbox to \textwidth{%
- \let\\=\relax
- \HeadFont \rightmark \hfil\PagenoFont\thepage}\kern 3pt
- \ifdim\HeadRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\HeadRuleDepth\fi}}%
- \def\@evenhead{\vbox{\hbox to \textwidth{%
- \let\\=\relax
- \PagenoFont \thepage\hfil\HeadFont \leftmark}\kern 3pt
- \ifdim\HeadRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\HeadRuleDepth\fi}}%
-\iffalse% RN 2005-01-17
- \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\FootFont \footmark\hfil\null}}}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\null\hfil\FootFont \footmark}}}%
-\else
- \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{%
- \FootFont \footmark\hfil\DTK@corr@version\null}}}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{%
- \null\FootFont\DTK@corr@version\hfil \footmark}}}%
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{The Page Style ``headings''}
-%
-% The page style headings is an alias to the page style plain.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/09/05}{definition for pagestyle headings added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\ps@headings\ps@plain
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{The Page Style ``part''}
-%
-% The page style \verb|part| contains the same foot as the page style
-% \verb|plain|. The head line is empty.
-%
-% This style is used when a new part is started. It can be
-% configured by redefining the macros \verb|FootRuleDepth|,
-% \verb|\FootFont|, and \verb|\PagenoFont|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\ps@part{%
- \let\@mkboth=\@gobbletwo
- \let\chaptermark=\@gobble
- \let\sectionmark=\@gobble
- \let\subsectionmark=\@gobble
- \let\@oddhead=\@empty
- \let\@evenhead=\@empty
-\iffalse% RN 2005-01-17
- \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\FootFont \footmark\hfil\null}}}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\null\hfil\FootFont \footmark}}}%
-\else
- \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{%
- \FootFont \footmark\hfil\DTK@corr@version\null}}}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{%
- \null\FootFont \DTK@corr@version\hfil\footmark}}}%
-\fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The default page style is plain. This has been set by the book
-% style before. If we want our changes to take effect we have to
-% reinitialize the page style.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\pagestyle{plain}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% \subsection{The Layout of the Titlepage}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DieTeXnischeKomoedie}
-% This macro produces the title page. It has three arguments. The
-% first argument is the number of the volume. This value is also
-% stored in the macro \verb|\volume| for later use. The second
-% argument is the number of the year and the third argument is the
-% date when this volume is released. The date is given as month and
-% year.
-%
-% The appearance of the cover page is determined by the macro
-% \verb|\CoverArt|. This can be redefined to get a different cover
-% page.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \AtEndOfClass{%\show\DTK@jobname
- \InputIfFileExists{\DTK@jobname.inf}{%
- \renewcommand\volume{\Volume}}{}}%
-\else
- \newcommand\DieTeXnischeKomoedie[3]{%
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- \gdef\Volume{#1}%
- \xdef\volume{\Volume}%???
- \gdef\DTKedition{#2}%
- \gdef\DTKdate{#3}%
- \immediate\openout\@unused \jobname.inf\relax
- \immediate\write\@unused{%
- \string\gdef\string\Volume{#1}^^J%
- \string\gdef\string\DTKedition{#2}^^J%
- \string\gdef\string\DTKdate{#3}%
- }%
- \immediate\closeout\@unused
- \iffalse% RN 2005-02-20; unnoetig, da localer \jobname usw.
- \global\let\bibliography=\DTK@bibliography
- \global\let\bibliographystyle=\@gobble
- \fi
- \CoverArt{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \newpage}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt}
-%
-% This macro implements the layout of the cover page of
-% DTK. It can be redefined to get a different layout.
-%
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Special effects via the packages
-% graphicx and color instead of PostScript specials.}
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{Correction of the size of the number on
-% the title page for volumes after 1999.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-\newfont\CoverTitleFont{cmr17 scaled \magstep 5}
-\newfont\CoverNumberFont{cmr17 scaled 3583}
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-\newcommand\CoverArt[3]{%
- \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
- \newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5}
- \fi
- \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined
- \newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986}
- \fi
- \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill
- \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont
- \journalname\hfill\null}%
- \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa
- \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa
- \hbox to\@tempdimb{%
- \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{%
- \vskip\wd\@tempboxa
- \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \ %
- \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight}
- \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright
- \rule{1em}{0pt}%
- \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em
- \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font
- DANTE\\
- Deutschsprachige\\
- Anwendervereinigung
- \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex]
- \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap
- \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}%
- \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}%
- {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
- \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}%
- \CoverNumberFont
- \null\hfill
- \makebox(0,0)[br]{%
- \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{%
- \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}%
- }}%
- \end{minipage}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{cover@sub}
-% Internal macro for typesetting the volume information on the
-% cover--front and back matter.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/31/12}{Extracted to allow configuration for
-% "`Die \TeX nichen Kontakte"'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\cover@sub[3]{%
- #2. Jahrgang\quad Heft #1\quad #3%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{CoverArt@grey}
-% Define the color for the number on the cover.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Color definition via color.sty}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \definecolor{CoverArt@grey}{gray}{.8}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@strip@no}
-% Extract the relevant part from the number of the issue.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{Correction of the macro to deal with
-% four digit numbers instead of striping two digits. This is used
-% since the year 2000.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\CoverArt@strip@no#1/#2;{#1\raisebox{0.35ex}{\CoverTitleFont/}#2}
-%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-\def\CoverArt@strip@no#1/#2#3#4#5;{%
- #1\raisebox{0.35ex}{\CoverTitleFont/}#4#5}
-%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@linewidth}
-%
-% This macro determines the thickness of the horizontal rule
-% separating the publisher from the edition information.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@linewidth{0pt}%{1.2pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@barwidth}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@barwidth{2.41pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@font}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@font{\Large\raggedleft}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@small}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@small{\footnotesize}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@gap}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@gap{2em}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Redefinitions}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{
- \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
- \newfont\CoverTitleFont{cmr17 scaled \magstep 5}%
- \fi
- \begin{center}
- {\LARGE DANTE\\[14pt]
- \Large Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ \eV}%
- \\\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\par\vfill
- \CoverTitleFont Die
- \\[22pt] \TeX nische
- \\[22pt] Kom{\"o}die
- \par\vfill\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\\[4pt]\large
- Heft #1\hfill #2.\ Jahrgang\hfill #3
- \normalsize
- \end{center}\vspace*{28.5pt}}
-%</1995>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Special code for 2007 layout}
-%
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{Class option for 2005 added. (RN)}
-% By now, the material is inserted all in one huge chunk.
-% Some parts of this material probably should be moved to other places
-% in the DTX file, where they belong.\\
-% \mbox{(HjG 2005-02-04)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*2007|2008>
-
-\ProvidesFile{dtk07.clo}
- [2007/08/28 v0.1 dtk class option (hv)]
-
-\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{%
- \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
- %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5}
- %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{lmr12 scaled 2938}
- \DeclareFixedFont\CoverTitleFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{41.26}%
- \fi
- \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined
- %\newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986}
- \DeclareFixedFont\CoverNumberFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{51.66}%
- \fi
- \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill
- \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont
- Die \journalname\hfill\null}%
- \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa
- \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa
- \hbox to\@tempdimb{%
- \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{%
- \vskip\wd\@tempboxa
- \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \
- \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight}
- \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright
- \rule{1em}{0pt}%
- \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em
- \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font
- {\Huge\DANTE}\\
- Deutschsprachige\\
- Anwendervereinigung
- \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex]
- \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap
- \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}%
- \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}%
- {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
- \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}%
- \CoverNumberFont
- \null\hfill
- \makebox(0,0)[br]{%
- \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{%
- \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}%
- }}% Warum verwendet `\CoverArt@strip@no' \CoverTitleFont? RN
- \end{minipage}%
-}
-
-\PassOptionsToPackage{ngerman}{babel}
-\RequirePackage{babel}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\frqq}%
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\flqq}%
-%\def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq}
-%\def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq}
-%
-\RequirePackage{showexpl}
-\lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX}
-\providecommand\lstverb{%
- \leavevmode\bgroup %
- \def\lst@boxpos{b}%
- \lsthk@PreSet\lstset{flexiblecolumns,basicstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize,backgroundcolor={},
- breaklines=false,keywordstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize}%
- \lsthk@TextStyle
- \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\afterassignment\lst@InlineG \let\@let@token}%
- \lstinline@}
-\providecommand*{\ctanurl}[1]{%
- \href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1}}%
-}
-%
-%\endinput
-%</2007|2008>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{List of Addresses}
-%
-% Addresses can be given anywhere throughout the whole
-% document. The address together with the page where it has been
-% given is stored in the index.
-%
-% The list of addresses is handled by the index mechanism of
-% \LaTeX. I (safely) assume that nobody has the desire to make an
-% index for a journal.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\address}
-% The address macro takes three arguments. The first argument is the
-% first name the second is the last name and the third is the
-% address where several lines can be included which are separated
-% by \verb|\\|.
-%
-% The macro can be e.g. as follows:\\
-% \verb|\address{Gerd}{Neugebauer}%|\\
-% \verb| {Mainzer Str. 8\\56321 Rhens}|
-%
-%
-% The address is given to \verb|\index| to be stored in the .idx
-% file. This file is sorted and reformatted to produce the sorted
-% list of addresses.
-%
-% The problem was to get the correct (German) ordering. For this
-% purpose the \TeX{} macros which are (normally) part of a name
-% have to be expanded properly. Unfortunately plain expansion may
-% leave braces which confuse makeindex. To get rid of these braces
-% we have to scan the tokens and transfer those tokens that are not
-% braces.
-%
-% We use one big assumption. We assume that a name does not contain
-% a dollar sign. Well, it is rather unusual that mathematics is
-% part of a name.
-%
-% The better solution would be a future version of makeindex which
-% is able to cope with those problems (wait and pray:-)
-% \changes{1.5}{2001/06/05}{Some magic for doublequote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*class>
-\chardef\DTK@cat=\the\catcode`\"
-\catcode`\"=13
-\newcommand\address[3]{%
- \begingroup
- \def\"##1{\@ifundefined{detex@@##1}{##1}%
- {\csname detex@@##1\endcsname}}%
- \ifcat a\noexpand"\else\let"=\"\fi
- \def\ss{ss}%
- \let\'=\relax
- \let\`=\relax
- \let\^=\relax
- \let\.=\relax
- \let\==\relax
- \let\d=\relax
- \let\b=\relax
- \let\c=\relax
- \let\v=\relax
- \let\H=\relax
- \let\t=\relax
- \let\u=\relax
- \let\~=\relax
- \def\o{o}%
- \def\O{O}%
- \def\aa{aa}%
- \def\AA{Aa}%
- \def\l{l}%
- \def\L{L}%
- \def\ae{ae}%
- \def\AE{Ae}%
- \def\oe{oe}%
- \def\OE{Oe}%
- \def\TeX{TeX}%
- \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
- \def\LaTeXe{LaTeX2e}%
- \let\null=\relax
- \xdef\@ddress{#2, #1}%
- \endgroup
- \begingroup
- \def\\{\string\\}%
- \ifcat a\noexpand"\else\def\"{\string"}\fi
- \def"{\string"}%
- \def\null{}%
- \expandafter\@strip\@ddress$%$
- \iffalse% RN 2005-01-15
- \index{\STRIP@*#1 #2!#3}%
- \else
- \glossary{\STRIP@*#1 #2!#3}%
- \fi
- \endgroup
-}
-\catcode`\"=\DTK@cat
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% For the removing of \TeX\ macros in addresses we need some
-% definitions to perform the mapping.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\strip@grp={
-\let\strip@end=$%$
-\def\@strip{\def\STRIP@{}\strip@I}
-\def\strip@I{\let\strip@next=\strip@I
- \futurelet\strip@CHAR\strip@II}
-\def\strip@II#1{%
- \ifx\strip@CHAR\strip@end
- \let\strip@next=\relax
- \else\ifx\strip@CHAR\strip@grp
- \strip@I #1$%$
- \let\strip@next=\strip@I
- \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR A
- \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@#1}%
- \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR.
- \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@#1}%
- \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR\space
- \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@ #1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \strip@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\detex@@a{ae}
-\def\detex@@o{oe}
-\def\detex@@u{ue}
-\def\detex@@A{Ae}
-\def\detex@@O{Oe}
-\def\detex@@U{Ue}
-\def\detex@@s{ss}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{theaddresses}
-% The addresses are collected in an environment Addresses. This
-% environment is used to customize the layout of this list.
-% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/08}{raggedright added.}
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/03}{boxing of address items and raggedbottom added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
-\newenvironment{theaddresses}{%
- \chapter{\addressname}\Label{addresses}
- \begingroup
- \columnsep=10pt
- \addresssize
- \def\addressitem##1##2##3{%
- \par
- \parbox{\columnwidth}{
- \textbf{##1}\hfill[\ignorespaces ##3]%
- \\ ##2}}
- \begin{multicols}{2}%
- \raggedbottom
- \raggedright
-}{%
- \end{multicols}%
- \endgroup
- }
-\fi
-\newcommand\addresssize{\footnotesize\parskip=6pt plus 2pt minus 3pt}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For older issues another definition has been used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995|1996>
-\let\addresssize\relax
-%</1995|1996>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\listofaddresses}
-% This macro reads the index file which is assumed to contain the
-% properly formatted list of authors. If this file does not exist
-% then a warning is printed.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \newcommand\listofaddresses{%
- \typeout{*** listofaddresses not supported in articles.}}
- \let\makeaddresses\relax% RN 2005-01-15
-\else
- \iffalse% RN 2005-01-15
- \newcommand\listofaddresses{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.ind}{}{%
- \typeout{No file \jobname.ind.}%
- \typeout{Use the following command to create it:\space\space
- makeindex -s dtk.ist \jobname}%
- \typeout{\space}}%
- }
- \else
- \newcommand\listofaddresses{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.gls}{}{%
- \typeout{No file \jobname.gls.}%
- \typeout{Use the following command to create it:^^J%
- \@spaces makeindex -s dtk.ist -o \jobname.gls \jobname.glo}%
- \typeout{\space}}%
- }
- \let\makeaddresses\makeglossary
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{The Table of Contents}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% The table of contents should appear as a page of it's own. It
-% should have an appropriate headline if it is long
-% enough. Otherwise the first page has no headline and no page
-% number.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% This macro produces the table of contents. It is not availlable
-% for single articles
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
- \typeout{*** tabelofcontents not supported in articles.}}
-\else
- \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
- \clearpage
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- \markboth{\contentsname}{\contentsname}%
- \ContentsArt
- \begingroup
- \parskip=\ContentsParSkip
- \let\\=\relax
- \TOC@configure
- \@starttoc{toc}
- \endgroup
- }
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TOC@configure}
-% This macro can be used to redefine properties of the table of
-% contents.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\TOC@configure\relax
-%</class>
-%<*1997|1998|1999>
-\def\TOC@configure{\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{bdx}}
-%</1997|1998|1999>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ContentsArt}
-% This macro is used to typeset the head of the table of contents.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\ContentsArt{%
- \vspace*{-\headheight}\vspace*{-\headsep}\vspace*{-2pt}
- \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
- \Huge \journalname\\[2pt]%
- \rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\\[2pt]%
- \null\hfill
- \CoverArt@small
- \cover@sub{\volume}{\DTKedition}{\DTKdate}
- \end{minipage}\vspace{16pt minus 8pt}\par
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995>
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \renewcommand\ContentsArt{\part@nosubtitle{\contentsname}}
-\fi
-%</1995>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bdx}{n}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>
- <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88> ecrb10
- }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bdx}{n}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>
- <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88> cmbdx10
- }{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The lines contained in the table of contents are determined by
-% the counter \verb|tocdepth|. The counter defines a level above
-% which the lines are suppressed in the table of contents.
-%
-% We are only interested in chapters and parts. Chapters have level
-% 0 and parts have level -1. Thus we set \verb|tocdepth| to 0.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{0}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The layout of the lines in the table of contents is determined by
-% the macros \verb|\l@|{\em type}. Some of them are redefined next.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
-% This macro determines the layout of the line in the table of
-% contents for parts. It simply imitates the layout of chapters
-% without additional space.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Definition modified.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\l@part[2]{%
- \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
- \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line
- \@tempdima 1.5em
- \begingroup
- \bf
- \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
- \hskip -\leftskip
- #1\par
- \penalty\@highpenalty
- \endgroup
- \addvspace{0.2em}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For older issues another definition has been used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995|1996>
-\renewcommand\l@part[2]{%
- \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
- \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line
- \@tempdima 1.5em
- \begingroup
- \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth
- \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
- \bf
- \leavevmode
- \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
- \hskip -\leftskip
- #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
- \penalty\@highpenalty
- \endgroup}
-%</1995|1996>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
-% This macro determines the layout of the line in the table of
-% contents for chapters. It simply imitates the layout of
-% sections.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Definition modified.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\l@chapter[2]{%
- \begingroup
- \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
- \@afterindenttrue
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \@tempdima 1.5em\relax % number width
- \@tempdimb 2.5em\relax % indent
- \advance\leftskip \@tempdimb
- \advance\rightskip \@tempdimb
-% \advance\leftskip \@tempdima
- \noindent\hskip -\leftskip
-% \hbox to\@tempdimb{\hbox to\@tempdima{\hss #2}\hss}%
- \hbox to\@tempdimb{#2\hss}%
- #1\par
- \endgroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For older issues another definition has been used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*1995|1996>
-\renewcommand\l@chapter{\@dottedtocline{0}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
-%</1995|1996>
-%<*class>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% For backward compatibility modes we have defined class options.
-% If an old layout is requested via a class option then we have to
-% load now the appropriate class option file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\iffalse% RN 2005-01-15
-\@ifundefined{DTK@layout}{}{\input dtk\DTK@layout.clo}
-\else
-\@ifundefined{DTK@layout}{}{\input{dtk\DTK@layout.clo}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% ??? New stuff !!!
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% RN 2005-01-15
-\IfFileExists{eurosans.sty}
-% Reicht eigentlich nicht; die Fonts selbst müssen auch
-% vorhanden sein...
-{%
- \RequirePackage{eurosans}
-% ==> http://home.vr-web.de/was/x/latexeuro.pdf
-% ==> ftp://ftp.adobe.com/pub/adobe/type/win/all/eurofont.exe
-% (unzip eurofont.exe...)
-% RN 2005-02-12
- %%%\AtBeginDocument{\let\texteuro\euro}
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteuro}{\euro}}% ???
-}
-{%
- % Das kann jeder.
- \let\DTK@texteuro\texteuro
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \renewcommand*\texteuro{\textsf{\DTK@texteuro}}}
-}
-% From: `graphics.cfg'
-% Send papersize information to the output driver
-\begingroup
- \chardef\x=0 %
- % check pdfTeX
- \@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{}{%
- \ifcase\pdfoutput
- \else
- \chardef\x=1 %
- \fi
- }%
- % check VTeX
- \@ifundefined{OpMode}{}{%
- \chardef\x=2 %
- }%
-\expandafter\endgroup
-\ifcase\x
- % default case
- \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\the\paperwidth,\the\paperheight}}%
-\or
- % pdfTeX is running in pdf mode
- \pdfpagewidth\paperwidth\pdfpageheight\paperheight
-\else
- % VTeX is running
- \mediawidth\paperwidth\mediaheight\paperheight
-\fi
-
-% RN 2005-01-15
-% Solange die lmodern-Schreibmaschinenschrift fehlerhaft ist
-% (nicht "monospaced"), nehmen wird das EC-Äquivalent. RN
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \begingroup% vielleicht noch intelligenter...
- \ttfamily
- \@tempdima\fontdimen3\font
- \advance\@tempdima\fontdimen4\font
- \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@
- \edef\@tempa{\ttdefault}\gdef\ttdefault{cmtt}%
- \ClassWarning{dtk}{%
- Font `\@tempa' is bad, changed to '\ttdefault'}%
- \fi
- \endgroup
-}
-% RN 2005-01-22
-\RequirePackage{makeidx}
-% RN 2005-01-22
-% Muss evtl. noch verbessert werden?
-\renewenvironment{theindex}
- {\begin{multicols}{2}[\section{\indexname}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}]%
- \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
- \columnseprule \z@
- \columnsep=10pt
- \raggedbottom\raggedright
- \let\item\@idxitem}
- {\end{multicols}}
-\renewcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
-\renewcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}}
-\renewcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}}
-%\renewcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
-\renewcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus1\p@\relax}
-
-% 2005-02-11
-\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook{}
-\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedDocumentclass{%
- \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook}
-\AtEmbeddedDocumentclass{%
-%%% \filename@parse{\protect#1}\edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}%???
-% \filename@parse{\DTK@local@jobname}%
-% \edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}%
- \edef\jobname{\DTK@local@jobname}%
-}
-%\show\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook
-\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook{}
-\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedBeginDocument{%
- \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook}
-\AtEmbeddedBeginDocument{}
-\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook{}
-\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{%
- \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook}
-\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{\endinput}
-% RN 2005-01-22
-\newcommand*\DTK@jobname{}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \edef\DTK@jobname{komoedie}
-\else
- \edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}
-\fi
-\newcommand*\DTK@local@jobname{}
-\newcommand*\DTK@local@inputname{}
-%%%\newcommand*\DTK@PSforPDF{}
-\newcommand*\DTK@eat@version[1][]{\ignorespaces}
-% Wie `\input', lädt aber auch komplette Dokumente. RN
-\newcommand*\DTK@usepackage{}
-\newcommand*\DTKinput[1]{%
- \begingroup
-% RN/HjG 2005-03-23
- \filename@parse{#1}%
- \edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}%
- \@ifundefined{filename@ext}%
- {\IfFileExists{\DTK@local@jobname.ltx}%
- {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{\DTK@local@jobname.ltx}}%
- {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{\DTK@local@jobname.tex}}%
- }%
- {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{#1}}%
- \renewcommand*\documentclass[2][]{%
- %%\edef\jobname{\DTK@local@jobname}%
- %%%\let\DTK@PSforPDF\PSforPDF
- %\renewcommand\PSforPDF[2][]{}%
- %%%\let\PSforPDF\@gobble
- \DTK@embedded@documentclasshook
- \DTK@eat@version}%
- \renewcommand*\usepackage[2][]{%
- \@ifnextchar[%]
- {\DTK@usepackage{##1}{##2}}%
- {\DTK@usepackage{##1}{##2}[]}%
- }%
- \def\DTK@usepackage##1##2[##3]{%
- \edef\@tempb{\zap@space##2 \@empty}%
- \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{\def\@tempb{inputenc}%
- \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
- \edef\@tempa{##1}%
- \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\inputencoding{##1}\fi
- \else
- \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\NeedPackage{\@tempa}%
- \RecordPackage{##1}\@tempa{##3}\DTK@local@inputname
- \fi
- \fi}}%
- \let\pagestyle\@gobble
- \let\thispagestyle\@gobble
- \let\nocite\@gobble
- \let\listfiles\relax
- \let\nofiles\relax
- \renewcommand*\AtBeginDocument[1]{%
- \typeout{\string\AtBeginDocument\space ignored!}}
- \renewcommand*\AtEndDocument[1]{%
- \typeout{\string\AtEndDocument\space ignored!}}
- \renewenvironment*{document}%
- %%%{\let\PSforPDF\DTK@PSforPDF}%
- %%%{\endinput}%
- {\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook}%
- {\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook}%
-% RN 2005-02-19, now moved!
-% \filename@parse{#1}%
-% \@ifundefined{filename@ext}%
-% {\InputIfFileExists{#1.ltx}{}{\input{#1}}}{\input{#1}}%
- \input{\DTK@local@inputname}%
-% end
- \endgroup
-}
-%%%\RequirePackage[final]{ps4pdf}
-\@ifdefinable\User@Packages{\newwrite\User@Packages}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- %%%\edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}%
- %%%\edef\PfP@container{\DTK@jobname-pics.pdf}%
- \ifDTK@Author@\else
- \listfiles
- \InputIfFileExists{userpackages.tex}%
- {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
- * File `userpackages.tex' used.^^J%
- *************************************}%
- \newcommand*\RecordPackage[4]{}%
- % warum gibt es kein \@gobblethree? ist jetzt egal!
- }%
- {%
- \immediate\openout\User@Packages userpackages.tex\relax
- \begingroup \catcode`\~=\active \let~=\space
- \immediate\write\User@Packages{%
- \@percentchar\space userpackages.tex^^J%
- \@percentchar\space generated by `\jobname'^^J%
- \@percentchar\space \DTK@today}%
- \endgroup
- \AtEndDocument{%
- \immediate\closeout\User@Packages\relax}%
- \newcommand*\RecordPackage[4]{%
- \immediate\write\User@Packages{%
- \string\usepackage[##1]{##2}[##3] %
- \@percentchar\space From file: ##4}}%
- }%
- \fi
- % RN 2005-03-21
- \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{%
- \ifDTK@Draft@\else
- \nolinenumbers
- \fi
- }{}
-}
-% RN 2005-01-22
-\def\indexname{Stichwortverzeichnis}% Besser woanders?
-% RN 2005-01-23
-\def\printindex{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\DTK@jobname.ind}{}{%
- \typeout{No file \DTK@jobname.ind.}%
- \typeout{Use the following command to create it:^^J%
- \@spaces makeindex -s dtk-idx.ist -o \DTK@jobname.ind \DTK@jobname.idx}%
- \typeout{\space}}%
-}
-% RN 2005-01-22
-\@fptop\z@
-
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now the class is complete.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</class>
-%<*logos>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{The Package dtklogos}
-%
-% This section contains some useful abbreviations. They are mainly
-% some kind of logos.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/27}{Logos moved to a separate package.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesPackage{dtklogos}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% First we have to determine which kind of \LaTeX{} is running. We use
-% the existence of the macro \verb|\documentclass| to see if we have a
-% \LaTeXe. This macro should not be defined in \LaTeX\,2.09.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifOldLaTeX
-\@ifundefined{documentclass}{\OldLaTeXtrue}{\OldLaTeXfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The following hack is from Bernd Raichle.
-%
-% For \LaTeX\,2.09 (with or without NFSS) we need something like
-% the \verb|\smaller| from the obsolete ``smaller.sty'' to emulate
-% SmallCaps for (nearly) all types of fonts. For SmallCaps it is
-% required to reduce further than for \verb|\smaller|. Thus we make
-% a new definition for \verb|\logo@smaller| which is oriented at
-% the ``math sizes'' (here: \verb|\scriptfont<fam>|) which is
-% defined in \LaTeXe.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifOldLaTeX
-\expandafter\ifx\csname selectfont\endcsname\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For OFSS a hack is needed to switch back to Family/Series/Shape.
-% For this purpose we ``abuse'' the ``math group/fam'' which is
-% changed similar to the macros from the file ``lfonts.tex''.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand{\logo@sm@ller}{\relax
- \expandafter\logo@sm@ll@r\expandafter{\the\fam}}
- \newcommand{\logo@sm@ll@r}[1]{%
- % \ifx\@currsize\tiny \tiny\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\scriptsize \tiny\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\footnotesize \tiny\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\small \scriptsize\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\normalsize \scriptsize\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\large \footnotesize\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\Large \normalsize\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\LARGE \large\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\huge \Large\fi
- \ifx\@currsize\Huge \huge\fi
- \ifcase#1\relax\rm\or\mit\or\cal\or\tenex % not sure about the tenex
- \or\it\or\sl\or\bf\or\tt\or\sf\or\sc\or\ly\fi}
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% With NFSS (for \LaTeX\,2.09) we can change the size indepenently
-% from the other font properties. Thus things are easier.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand{\logo@sm@ller}{%
- \relax\@nomath\logo@smaller
- \ifx\f@size\@vpt \else
- \ifx\f@size\@vipt \fontsize\@vpt{6pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@viipt \fontsize\@vpt{6pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@viiipt \fontsize\@vipt{7pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@ixpt \fontsize\@vipt{7pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@xpt \fontsize\@viipt{8pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@xipt \fontsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@xiipt \fontsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@xivpt \fontsize\@xpt{12pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@xviipt \fontsize\@xiipt{14pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@xxpt \fontsize\@xivpt{18pt}\fi
- \ifx\f@size\@xxvpt \fontsize\@xxpt{25pt}\fi
- \selectfont
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The first versions of NFSS have used the macro name \verb|\size|
-% instead of \verb|\fontsize|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{fontsize}{\let\fontsize=\size}{}
-\fi
-\newcommand{\logo@smaller}{\protect\logo@sm@ller}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Macros from texnames.sty}
-%
-% The following macros are taken from the file {\tt texnames.sty}
-% version \verb|1.09| from \verb|<16 March 1993>| by Nelson
-% H.\,F.~Beebe. I have simply included the definitions here to avoid
-% additional files to be distributed with dtk.dtx. The original
-% documentation has been wrapped into the doc format. And here it goes:
-%
-% In the following, we first give the ``official'' definition,
-% then follow it with spelling variants. Alternate definitions
-% are discarded in favor of the official one. Each family is
-% separated by a line like the following one.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TeX}
-% Only change from plain.tex is the \verb|\spacefactor| assignment
-% (suggested by Phil Taylor), so that \TeX\ at the end of a
-% sentence isn't treated as an abbreviation.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\TeX{T\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX%
- \spacefactor1000 }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AmS}
-% From the AMS tex/ams/amslatex/fontsel/nfssinst.tex file:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\AmS{%
- \(\cal A\)\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox
- {\(\cal M\)}\kern-.125em{\(\cal S\)}}
-\providecommand\AMS{\AmS}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\XeTeX}
-% The new TeX\ program
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand{\XeTeX}{X\kern-.1em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.15em\TeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AmSLaTeX}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX}
-\providecommand\AMSLaTeX{\AmSLaTeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AmSTeX}
-% Mike Spivak's amstex/amstex.tex 1.1d [26-Aug-1988] has\\
-% \verb|\def\AmSTeX{{\textfontii A}\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox|\\
-% \verb| {\textfontii M}\kern-.125em{\textfontii S}-\TeX}|\\
-% and 2.1 [05-Apr-1991] has an equivalent definition.
-% AmSTeX's \verb|\textfontii| is exactly the same as \verb|\cal|, which
-% all \TeX variants understand.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\AmSTeX{%
- $\cal A$\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal M$}%
- \kern-.125em$\cal S$-\TeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AMSTEX}
-% Leslie Lamport's latex/tmanual.tex [10-Jul-1984] (an early
-% draft of the book) defines it in uppercase with the standard
-% definition.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\AMSTEX{\AmSTeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AMSTEX}
-% Barbara Beeton's latex/deproc.sty [24-Apr-1986] and inputs/tugbot.sty
-% [11-Jan-1988] uses this spelling, but the definition\\
-% \verb|\leavevmode\hbox{$\cal A\kern-.2em\lower.376ex \hbox{$\cal|\\
-% \verb|M$}\kern-.2em\cal S$-\TeX}|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\AMSTeX{\AmSTeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\BibTeX}
-% The definitions of \verb|\BibTeX| and \verb|\SLiTeX| in Leslie Lamport's
-% latex/local.tex lower the E by 0.7ex, while \TeX in plain.tex lowers
-% it by 0.5ex. Oren Patashnik's bibtex/btxdoc.tex and bibtex/btxhak.tex
-% [08-Feb-1988] and bibtex/bibtex.web 0.99c [xx-Feb-1988] use this same
-% name and definition, but Oren said using \TeX here is ok. (Curiously,
-% \LaTeX itself does not define macros for any \TeX ware except \LaTeX and
-% \TeX!)
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifOldLaTeX
- \newcommand{\BibTeX}{\protect\pBibTeX}
- \newcommand{\pBibTeX}{B\kern-.05em%
- \hbox{\logo@smaller I\kern-.025emB}\kern-.08em%
- \-\TeX}
-\else
- \DeclareRobustCommand{\BibTeX}{B\kern-.05em%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following hack comes from the definition of the macro \LaTeX\
-% cf.~file ``ltlogos.dtx'' from the \LaTeXe\ distribution. der
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \hbox{$\m@th$% %% force math size calculations
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
- I\kern-.025emB}%
- \kern-.08em%
- \-\TeX}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\BIBTeX}
-% Leslie Lamport uses this spelling in latex.tex, but not as a
-% macro. We include it for consistency with AMSTeX.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\BIBTeX{\BibTeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\BIBTEX}
-% Leslie Lamport's latex/slides.tex [05-Jun-1984],
-% latex/tmanual.tex [10-Jul-1984] (an early draft of the book),
-% and latex/lerrata.tex [23-Jul-1985] have this spelling, but the
-% definition \verb|BIB\kern-.1em\TeX|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\BIBTEX{\BibTeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LAMSTeX}
-% From tugboat.com 1.08 [24-Oct-1990].
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\LAMSTeX{%
- L\raise.42ex\hbox{\kern-.3em\the\scriptfont2 A}%
- \kern-.2em\lower.376ex\hbox{\the\textfont2 M}%
- \kern-.125em {\the\textfont2 S}-\TeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LamSTeX}
-% This is just a variant of the macro above.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\LamSTeX{\LAMSTeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LAmSTeX}
-% This variant seems likely to appear:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\LAmSTeX{\LAMSTeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX}
-% The definition from latex.tex (\LaTeX{} VERSION 2.09 $<$14 January
-% 1991$>$) and bibtex.web 0.99c [xx-Feb-1988] lowers the E slightly
-% more than \TeX, but consistency seems more desirable. See
-% comments at \BibTeX. Different definitions are given by
-% latex/deproc.sty [24-Apr-1986], amstex/man.sty [15-Dec-1986]
-% inputs/tugbot.sty [11-Jan-1988], and latex/tugboat.com 1.08
-% [24-Oct-1990].
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\LaTeX{%
- L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}\kern-.15em\TeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LATEX}
-% latex/slides.tex [05-Jun-1984] and latex/lerrata.tex [23-Jul-1985]
-% have this spelling, but different definitions
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\LATEX{\LaTeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXTeX}
-% This logo is invented in \verb|dtk.cls| to denote either \TeX{} or
-% \LaTeX.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifOldLaTeX
- \newcommand\LaTeXTeX{(\kern-.15emL\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc
- a}\kern-.3em)\kern-.15em\TeX}%
-\else
- \DeclareRobustCommand{\LaTeXTeX}{(\kern-.15emL\kern-.36em%
- {\sbox\z@ T%
- \vbox to\ht0{\hbox{$\m@th$%
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
- A}%
- \vss}%
- }\kern-.2em)%
- \kern-.15em%
- \TeX}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\MF}
-% Don Knuth's mf.web 2.7 [xx-Sep-1990] and Barbara Beeton's
-% latex/deproc.sty [24-Apr-1986] use an equivalent of this definition.
-% The font is variously named \verb|\logo|, \verb|\manfnt|, and
-% \verb|\mf|. plain.tex
-% preloads \verb|\manfnt|. manfnt has the letters A, E, F, M, N, O, T in
-% various sizes plus extra symbols for Don Knuth's books Computers and
-% Typesetting, and Concrete Mathematics, while logo10 has only those
-% letters in one size. AmSTeX uses \verb|\logo| in amsppt.sty and
-% imappt.sty, so we should avoid it, and tugboat.com uses
-% \verb|\mf| for \verb|{\smc Metafont}|. We therefore use
-% \verb|\manfnt| here, defining it if necessary. QUESTION: should
-% we use manfnt, or logo10?
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifOldLaTeX
- \ifx\manfnt\@undefined
- \font\manfnt=logo10
- \fi
- \ifx\manfntsl\@undefined
- \font\manfntsl=logosl10
- \fi
- \newcommand\MF{\begingroup
- \ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \let\manfnt=\manfntsl \fi
- {\manfnt META}\-{\manfnt FONT}\endgroup\spacefactor1000 }%
- \newcommand\MP{\begingroup
- \ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \let\manfnt=\manfntsl \fi
- {\manfnt META}\-{\manfnt POST}\endgroup\spacefactor1000 }%
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following improved definitions are taken from mflogo by Ulrik
-% Vieth.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \DeclareFontFamily{U}{logo}{}
- \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{m}{n}{
- <8> <9> gen * logo
- <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> logo10
- }{}
- \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{m}{it}{
- <8> <9> gen * logosl
- <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> logosl10
- }{}
- \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{m}{sl}{
- <-> ssub * logo/m/it
- }{}
- \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{sbc}{n}{
- <8> <9> sub * logo/m/n
- <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> logobf10
- }{}
- \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{b}{n}{
- <8> <9> sub * logo/m/n
- <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> logod10
- }{}
- \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{bx}{n}{
- <-> ssub * logo/b/n
- }{}
- \DeclareRobustCommand\logofamily{%
- \not@math@alphabet\logofamily\relax
- \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{logo}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlogo}{\logofamily}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Hyphenation of meta-font and meta-post only.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand\MF{\mbox{\textlogo{META}}\-\mbox{\textlogo{FONT}}\@}
- \newcommand\MP{\mbox{\textlogo{META}}\-\mbox{\textlogo{POST}}\@}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\METAFONT}
-% I cannot find any ``official'' uses of this alternate, but it
-% seems likely that people will use it.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\METAFONT{\MF}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\METAPOST}
-% In analogy to \verb|METAFONT|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\METAPOST{\MP}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SLITEX}
-% Leslie Lamport's latex/slides.tex [05-Jun-1984]. His
-% latex/lerrata.tex [23-Jul-1985] and latex/tmanual.tex
-% [10-Jul-1984] (an early draft of the book) define it as
-% SLI\TeX! The \LaTeX\ User's Guide and Reference Manual (1986)
-% appears to use small caps, and possibly kerning, for Sli.
-% I need to ask Leslie to suggest a preferred definition.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\SLITEX{%
- S\kern-.065em L\kern-.18em\raise.32ex\hbox{i}%
- \kern-.03em\TeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SLiTeX}
-% latex/local.tex (sample Local Guide) [27-Oct-1988] uses
-% this name, but defines it as\\
-% \verb|{\rm S\kern-.06em{\sc l\kern-.035emi}\kern-.06em T\kern|\\
-% \verb| -.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}|\\
-% with an extra-low E, and kerned Sli in small caps. Is this
-% what the \LaTeX\ User's Guide and Reference Manual (1986) used?
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\SLiTeX{\SLITEX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SliTeX}
-% latex/slitex.tex [08-Jun-1988] uses SliTeX in typeouts,
-% but not as a macro -- what a way to confuse the user.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\SliTeX{\SLITEX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SLITeX}
-% I cannot find a use of this one, but it seems a likely
-% candidate anyway, and is consistent with AMSTeX and BIBTeX.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\SLITeX{\SLITEX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Additional Macros}
-%
-% Some additional logos showed up during the years they are
-% collected in this section.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\NTS}
-% This one comes from a communication with Bernd Raichle.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\NTS{\mbox{\mathsurround=0pt
- \(\cal N\mkern -4mu\lower .5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\mkern -2mu S\)}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\MakeIndex}
-% This one comes from a communication with Bernd Raichle based on
-% makeindex.tex -- released 17 February 1987 by Leslie Lamport.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\MakeIndex{\textit{Make\-Index}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\emTeX}
-%
-% \changes{1.3}{1997/02/03}{logo added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\emTeX{{em\TeX}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\PublicTeX}
-%
-% \changes{1.3}{1997/02/03}{logo added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\PubliCTeX{PubliC\TeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TeXXeT}
-% This one comes from the sources of web2c.
-% \changes{1.2}{1996/12/15}{logo added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\TeXXeT{%
- \TeX--X\kern-.125em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.1667emT}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TeXeT}
-% This one comes from the sources of web2c.
-% \changes{1.2}{1996/12/15}{logo added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\TeXeT{%
- \TeX-X\kern-.125em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.1667emT}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\WinEdt}
-% This one comes from Volker RW Schaa.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{logos added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\WinEdt{\mbox{\textsf{WinEdt}}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\WinEdtKK}
-% This one comes from Volker RW Schaa.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{logos added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\WinEdtKK{\mbox{\textsf{WinEdt2k}}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LyX}
-% This one comes from an article by Laura E. Jackson and Herbert Vo\ss.
-% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{logo added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand{\LyX}{L\kern-.1667em\lower.25em\hbox{Y}\kern-.125emX\@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\exTeX}
-% This one comes from the \exTeX\ team
-% \changes{1.9}{2003/11/03}{logo added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand*{\exTeX}{%
- \textrm{% das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet
- \ensuremath{\textstyle\varepsilon_{\kern-0.15em\mathcal{X}}}%
- \kern-.15em\TeX
- }%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Additional Macros for Acronyms}
-%
-% The following macros are maily form the predecessor style
-% file. Some new ones have been added.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eV}
-% The abbreviation for e.V\kern-.18em.\ is defined in
-% this macro. The kerning of the letters is corrected manually.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand\eV{e.V\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Disclaimer: I have not invented this macro. It has been defined
-% this way in the predecessor style.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</logos>
-%<*1995>
- \renewcommand\eV{e.\kern-.18emV\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}}
-%</1995>
-%<*logos>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dante}
-% The ``official logo'' for DANTE e.V\kern-.18em.\ is defined.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\dante{DANTE \eV}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Dante}
-% The long name of DANTE.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Dante{DANTE,
- Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX~\eV}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DTK}
-% The long name of this booklet, eh journal.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\DTK{Die \TeX\-ni\-sche Ko\-m{\"o}\-die}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXe}
-% If \verb|\LaTeXe| is not defined then define it. Since this macro
-% is so essential we just want to be sure that it exists.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\LaTeXe{%
- \LaTeX{}\kern.05em2$_{\textstyle\varepsilon}$}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\PS}
-% We define the logo for Post\-Script.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\PS{Post\-Script}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\PiC}
-% For some reason this is not defined in texnames.sty. Since it has
-% been in the predecessor of this style it is also defined here.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\PiC{P\kern-.12em\lower.5ex\hbox{I}\kern-.075emC}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\PiCTeX}
-% Now the previous macro is combined with \TeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\PiCTeX{\PiC\kern-.11em\TeX}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TUG}
-% The \TeX{} Users Group.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\TUG{\TeX{} Users Group}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TUGboat}
-% The communications of the \TeX{} Users Group.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\TUGboat{\textsl{TUGboat}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TUB}
-% The communications of the \TeX{} Users Group.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\TUB\TUGboat
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TTN}
-% The communications of the \TeX{} Users Group
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\TTN{\textsl{\TeX{} and TUG NEWS}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\NFSS}
-% The New Font Selection Scheme.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\NFSS{\textsf{NFSS}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\NTS}
-% I don't know where this one comes from.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{NTS logo added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\NTS{\leavevmode
- \hbox{$\cal N\kern-0.35em\lower0.5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\kern-0.2emS$}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\eTeX}
-% I don't know where this one comes from.
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{eTeX logo added.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\eTeX{{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\TeX}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ExTeX}
-% ^^A das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet
-% This logo will generally sport serifs.
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{ExTeX logo added. (RN)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand*{\ExTeX}{% RN 2005-01-15
- \textrm{% das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet
- \ensuremath{\textstyle\varepsilon_{\kern-0.15em\mathcal{X}}}%
- \kern-.15em\TeX
- }%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DANTE}
-% The ``official logo'' for DANTE is defined, using special fonts.
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{DANTE logo with special fonts added. (RN)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\IfFileExists{ot1dante.fd}% RN 2005-01-15
-{%
- \providecommand*\DANTE[1][]{%
- \begingroup
- \usefont{OT1}{dante}{m}{n}\selectfont DANTE%
- \endgroup
- }
-}
-{\providecommand*\DANTE[1][]{DANTE}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ConTeXt}
-% \begin{macro}{\conTeXt}
-% This one has been missing for a long time!
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/17}{ConTeXt logos added. (RN)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand*\ConTeXt{Con\TeX t}
-\providecommand*\conTeXt{con\TeX t}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Than}
-% Makes life easier \ldots
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\Thanh{H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{\relax}}} Th\`anh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\MiKTeX}
-% \begin{macro}{\MikTeX}
-% Yet another logo \dots
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/17}{MiKTeX logo added. (RN)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand*\MiKTeX{MiK\TeX}
-\providecommand*\MikTeX\MiKTeX
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</logos>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%^^A ??? 2005-02-11
-% \section{The Package dtk-pdf for PDF Reprints}
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Packet dtk-pdf integrated.}
-%
-% The following section contains the package which is used to
-% produce the PDF files for the WWW.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*pdf>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% A lot of packages are required to get things right.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvidesPackage{dtk-pdf}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% A lot of packages are required to get things right.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\RequirePackage{multicol,graphicx,color}
-\RequirePackage[bookmarks=false]{hyperref}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Configure the \verb|hyperref| package appropriately.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\definecolor{navy}{rgb}{0,0,.5}
-\hypersetup{a5paper,colorlinks,urlcolor=navy}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Slightly adjust the page on the paper.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\oddsidemargin=-10mm
-\evensidemargin=-10mm
-\topmargin=-15mm
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Volume}
-% This macro contains the number of the volume in which the current
-% article has been published.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\Volume{?/??}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Pages}
-% This macro contains the numbers of the pages on which the
-% curtrent article has been published originally.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\Pages{???}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\volume}
-% This macro is redefined to show appropriate information.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\volume{\Volume\ -- Nachdruck}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\titlemark}
-% This macro is used in some old articles. Nowadays it simply has
-% to eat up one following argument.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\titlemark\@gobble
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\AdNo \AdNo=0
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Address}
-% This macro is used to typeset all adresses.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\Address{\bigskip\par\advance\AdNo1
- \begin{multicols}2 \count255=0\relax
- \loop\csname Address\the\count255\endcsname\advance\count255 1
- \ifnum\count255<\AdNo \repeat
- \end{multicols}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\address[3]{%
- \expandafter\gdef\csname Address\the\AdNo\endcsname
- {\par\parbox{.45\textwidth}{\footnotesize\raggedright
- #1 #2 \\#3}}\advance\AdNo1\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Store the address of DANTE as first address in the list.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\address{\href{http://www.dante.de/}{\Dante}}{}{%
- \href{http://www.dante.de/}{Postfach 10\,18\,40\\
- 69008 Heidelberg\\
- \texttt{dante@dante.de}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand\DTK@keywords{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\m@ketitle}
-% Save the meaning of \verb|\maketitle| to extend it.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\m@ketitle=\maketitle
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
-% The macro is redefined to typeset the head of the single article.
-% Th information for the author and the title are stored in the PDF
-% information fields aswell. This may lead to problems if they
-% contain certain macros.
-% \changes{1.5}{2001/10/21}{Mapping of certain macros}
-% \changes{1.8}{2003/06/22}{Making thanks void when processing the
-% head of a reprint}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\maketitle{%
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- \newlength{\l@@x}\settowidth{\l@@x}{\Large\DTK}%
- \advance\l@@x3em\quad
- \href{http://www.dante.de/dante/DTK}{%
- \rotatebox{90}{\hspace*{1.5em}\Large\DTK}}
- \rule{.9pt}{\l@@x}\quad
- %
- \begin{minipage}[b]{.75\textwidth}\parskip=1ex
- {\raggedleft\large
- \href{http://www.dante.de/}{DANTE\\
- Deutschsprachige\\
- Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ e.V.}\medskip\par
- }%
- {\let\thanks\@gobble
- \ifx\@author\empty\else\@author: \fi
- \ifx\@title\empty\else\emph{\@title}, \fi
- }
- \DTK\ \Volume, S.\ \Pages.\medskip
-
- \scriptsize Reproduktion oder Nutzung dieses Beitrags durch
- konventionelle, elektronische oder beliebige andere Verfahren ist
- nur im nicht-kommerziellen Rahmen gestattet. Verwendungen in
- gr"o"serem Umfang bitte zur Information bei \dante{} melden. F\"ur
- kommerzielle Nutzung ist die Zustimmung der Autoren einzuholen.
-
- \DTK\ ist die Mitgliedszeitschrift von \Dante. Einzelne Hefte
- k\"onnen von Mitgliedern bei der Gesch\"aftsstelle von \Dante\
- erworben werden. Mitglieder erhalten \DTK\ im Rahmen ihrer
- Mitgliedschaft.
- \end{minipage}
-
- \begingroup
- \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
- \def\BibTeX{BibTeX}%
- \def\TeX{TeX}%
- \def\LyX{LyX}%
- \hypersetup{%
- pdftitle=\@title,
- pdfauthor=\@author,
- pdfkeywords={\DTK@keywords},
- pdfsubject={\volume},
- pdfstartview={FitBH}
- }%
- \endgroup
- \m@ketitle
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textcentigrade}
-% This macro is defined for backward compatibility.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\textcentigrade{\textcelsius}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \verb|\guillemotleft|/\verb|\guillemotright| from the polish
-% version of the ``computer modern''.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareFontEncoding{OT4}{}{}%
- \DeclareFontEncoding{TS1}{}{}%
- \DeclareFontSubstitution{OT4}{cmr}{m}{n}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{\encodingdefault}{%
- {\fontencoding{OT4}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char174}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{\encodingdefault}{%
- {\fontencoding{OT4}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char175}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guilsinglleft}{\encodingdefault}{%
- {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char14}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guilsinglright}{\encodingdefault}{%
- {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char15}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{\encodingdefault}{%
- {\fontencoding{TS1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char135}}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifmaintitle
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Old versions of \LaTeX\ used to define \verb|\footheight|. Some
-% articles try to redefine this length. Nowadays it is simply
-% ignored.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newlength\footheight
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now the packet is complete.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</pdf>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{The Index Style}
-% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/27}{Index file integrated into the dtx file.}
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{Addresses are now collected via
-% glossary instead of index (RN).}
-% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{Add keyword \cmd{\glossaryentry} (RN).}
-%
-% The index style is used to sort the authors of the journal for
-% the list of all authors. Makeindex is used for this purpose. Here
-% we have to define the appropriate configuration file.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*adr>
-actual '*'
-preamble "\\begin{theaddresses}"
-postamble "\n\\end{theaddresses}\n"
-item_0 "\n \\addressitem{"
-item_2 "}{"
-item_x1 "}{"
-item_x2 "}{"
-delim_0 "}{"
-delim_1 "}{"
-delim_2 "}{"
-delim_t "}"
-group_skip ""
-quote '$'
-%%$
-keyword "\\glossaryentry"
-%</adr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \section{The Index Style}
-%
-% ???
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*idx>
-%%
-%% This is file `Letter.ist',
-%%
-%% The idea is from Ingo Kloeckl, Latex2e:
-%% Herbert Voss 000726
-%%
-%% This is a MAKEINDEX style file which should be used to
-%% generate the formatted change history for use with the doc
-%% package. The TeX commands used below are defined in
-%% doc.sty. The commands for MAKEINDEX like `level'
-%% `item_x1' are described in `` Makeindex, A General
-%% Purpose, Formatter-Independent Index Processor'' by
-%% Pehong Chen.
-%%
-headings_flag 1 % headings yes
-heading_prefix "{\\SectionFont "%
-heading_suffix "}\n" % newline
-%
-quote '"'
-%%level '>'
-preamble
- "\\begin{theindex}\n"
-item_1
- "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent10pt\\makebox[10pt][l]{--}"
-item_01
- "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent10pt\\makebox[10pt][l]{--}"
-item_x1
- "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent10pt\\makebox[10pt][l]{--}"
-item_2
- "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent20pt\\makebox[20pt][l]{-- -- }"
-item_12
- "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent20pt\\makebox[20pt][l]{-- -- }"
-item_x2
- "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent20pt\\makebox[20pt][l]{-- -- }"
-%%
-%%
-%% End of file `Letter.ist'.
-%</idx>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% That's all.
-%
-% \Finale
-%
-\endinput
-%
-% Local Variables:
-% mode: latex
-% TeX-master: t
-% End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 9d8b200d3b1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-%% Time-stamp: "dtk.ins 2007-08-28 21:43:35 hv"
-%%------------------------------------------------------------------
-%% Driver file to extract the dtx style and class files.
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
-%% Copyright (C) 1997-2005 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
-%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
-%%
-%% dtk.ins is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
-%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
-%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
-%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
-%% he says so in writing.
-%%
-%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
-%% dtk.ins, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
-%% modifications are indicated.
-%%
-%%------------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% Run this file through TeX or LaTeX to extract the files.
-%% You need the docstrip package as distributed with LaTeX2e.
-%% It is also available as seperate package from any CTAN site.
-%%
-%%------------------------------------------------------------------
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% $Id: dtk.ins,v 1.6 2007/08/28 20:57:17 hv Exp $
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\input docstrip.tex
-\keepsilent
-\askonceonly
-
-\generate{
-% style file still useful?
- \file{dtk.sty}{\from{dtk.dtx}{class}}
- \file{dtk.cls}{\from{dtk.dtx}{class}}
-% \file{dtk95.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1995}}
-% \file{dtk96.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1996}}
-% \file{dtk97.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1997}}
-% \file{dtk98.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1998}}
-% \file{dtk99.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1999}}
-% \file{dtk00.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2000}}
-% \file{dtk01.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2001}}
-% \file{dtk02.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2002}}
-% \file{dtk03.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2003}}
-% \file{dtk04.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2004}}
-% \file{dtk05.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2005}}
-% \file{dtk06.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2006}}
- \file{dtk07.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2006|2007}}
-% \file{dtk08.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2008}}
-% \file{dtk09.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2009}}
- \file{dtklogos.sty}{\from{dtk.dtx}{logos}}
- \file{dtk-pdf.sty}{\from{dtk.dtx}{pdf}}
- }
-% warum ohne Prae-/Postambel?
-% Makeindex vertraegt doch % als Kommentarzeichen -- oder?
-\nopreamble\nopostamble
-\generate{
- \file{dtk-idx.ist}{\from{dtk.dtx}{idx}}
- \file{dtk-adr.ist}{\from{dtk.dtx}{adr}}
- }
-
-\Msg{****************************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by (La)TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space dtk.cls dtk.sty}
-%\Msg{* \space\space dtk95.clo dtk96.clo dtk97.clo dtk98.clo dtk99.clo}
-%\Msg{* \space\space dtk00.clo dtk01.clo dtk02.clo dtk03.clo} % dtk04.clo
-\Msg{* \space\space dtk07.clo} % dtk06.clo dtk07.clo dtk08.clo dtk09.clo
-\Msg{* \space\space dtklogos.sty dtk-pdf.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* and the following file into a directory searched by makeindex:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space dtk-idx.ist dtk-adr.ist}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Additionally copy the following file to a directory searched}
-\Msg{* by BibTeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space dtk.bst}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run dtk.dtx through LaTeX,}
-\Msg{* makeindex, and LaTeX twice again.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{****************************************************************}
-
-\endbatchfile
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty
index 0ffe3cc2a87..45f5eb48f3f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@
%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
%%
%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
+%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 2.0 2009/07/26 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%% Purpose:
%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
@@ -77,8 +77,8 @@
%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2}
\def\filename{dtk.dtx}
-\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $}
-\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $}
+\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.9a $}
+\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2005/10/29 18:17:42 $}
\let\docversion=\fileversion
\let\docdate=\filedate
\ProvidesPackage{dtk-pdf}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene]
@@ -103,8 +103,8 @@
\expandafter\gdef\csname Address\the\AdNo\endcsname
{\par\parbox{.45\textwidth}{\footnotesize\raggedright
#1 #2 \\#3}}\advance\AdNo1\relax}
-\address{\href{http://www.dante.de/}{\Dante}}{}{%
- \href{http://www.dante.de/}{Postfach 10\,18\,40\\
+\address{\href{http://cms.dante.de/}{\Dante}}{}{%
+ \href{http://cms.dante.de/}{Postfach 10\,18\,40\\
69008 Heidelberg\\
\texttt{dante@dante.de}}}
\providecommand\DTK@keywords{}
@@ -113,13 +113,13 @@
\thispagestyle{empty}%
\newlength{\l@@x}\settowidth{\l@@x}{\Large\DTK}%
\advance\l@@x3em\quad
- \href{http://www.dante.de/dante/DTK}{%
+ \href{http://archiv.dante.de/dante/DTK}{%
\rotatebox{90}{\hspace*{1.5em}\Large\DTK}}
\rule{.9pt}{\l@@x}\quad
%
\begin{minipage}[b]{.75\textwidth}\parskip=1ex
{\raggedleft\large
- \href{http://www.dante.de/}{DANTE\\
+ \href{http://cms.dante.de/}{DANTE\\
Deutschsprachige\\
Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ e.V.}\medskip\par
}%
@@ -131,8 +131,8 @@
\scriptsize Reproduktion oder Nutzung dieses Beitrags durch
konventionelle, elektronische oder beliebige andere Verfahren ist
- nur im nicht-kommerziellen Rahmen gestattet. Verwendungen in
- gr"o"serem Umfang bitte zur Information bei \dante{} melden. F\"ur
+ nur im nichtkommerziellen Rahmen gestattet. Verwendungen in
+ gr\"o\ss erem Umfang bitte zur Information bei \dante{} melden. F\"ur
kommerzielle Nutzung ist die Zustimmung der Autoren einzuholen.
\DTK\ ist die Mitgliedszeitschrift von \Dante. Einzelne Hefte
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f34fc7d9759
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+
+\ProvidesFile{dtk.clo}
+ [2009/11/07 v0.2 dtk class option (RN,hv)]
+
+\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{%
+ \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
+ %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5}
+ %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{lmr12 scaled 2938}
+ \DeclareFixedFont\CoverTitleFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{41.26}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined
+ %\newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986}
+ \DeclareFixedFont\CoverNumberFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{51.66}%
+ \fi
+\iffalse
+ \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill
+ \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont
+ \fontsize{41.26}{42}\selectfont\journalname\hfill\null}%
+ \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa
+ \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa
+ \hbox to\@tempdimb{\kern-20pt%
+ \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{%
+ \vskip\wd\@tempboxa
+ \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \
+ \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight}
+\fi
+ \newsavebox\dtk@titlebox
+ \sbox\dtk@titlebox{\parbox{\textheight}{%
+ \null\hfill\CoverTitleFont\fontsize{41.26}{42}\selectfont\journalname\hfill\null}}
+% \hspace*{5pt}
+ \rotatebox{90}{\usebox\dtk@titlebox}\
+ \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight}
+ \hfill
+%
+ \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright
+ \rule{1em}{0pt}%
+ \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em
+ \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font
+ {\Huge\DANTE}\\
+ Deutschsprachige\\
+ Anwendervereinigung
+ \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex]
+ \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap
+ \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}%
+ \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}%
+ {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+ \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}%
+ \CoverNumberFont
+ \null\hfill
+ \makebox(0,0)[br]{%
+ \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{%
+ \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}%
+ }}% Warum verwendet `\CoverArt@strip@no' \CoverTitleFont? RN
+ \end{minipage}%
+}
+
+%\PassOptionsToPackage{ngerman}{babel}
+%\RequirePackage[ngerman]{babel}
+
+\iffalse
+\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\frqq}%
+\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\flqq}%
+%\def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq}
+%\def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq}
+\else
+ \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{%
+ \defineshorthand{"`}{\guillemotright}
+ \defineshorthand{"'}{\guillemotleft}
+ }{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{ngerman}{%
+ \def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq}
+ \def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq}
+ }{}%
+ }
+\fi
+
+\newif\ifDTKcolor \DTKcolorfalse
+
+\RequirePackage{xcolor}
+\RequirePackage{longtable}
+\RequirePackage[font=sf]{caption}
+
+\ifDTKcolor
+ \definecolor{DTKlstBackground}{rgb}{1,1,0.85}
+ \definecolor{DTKlstKeys}{rgb}{0,0,1}
+ \definecolor{DTKlstIdentifiers}{rgb}{0,0,0}
+ \definecolor{DTKlstComments}{rgb}{1,0,0}
+ \definecolor{DTKlstStrings}{rgb}{0,0.5,0}
+\else
+ \colorlet{DTKlstBackground}{black!10}
+ \colorlet{DTKlstKeys}{black}
+ \colorlet{DTKlstIdentifiers}{black}
+ \colorlet{DTKlstComments}{black}
+ \colorlet{DTKlstStrings}{black}
+\fi
+
+\RequirePackage[final]{listings}
+
+\newcommand*\DTK@lst@colorbox[2]{%
+ \fboxsep=.16em\relax
+ \settowidth\@ovxx{#2}\settoheight\@ovyy{#2}%
+ \makebox[\@ovxx][c]{\colorbox{#1}{\raisebox{0pt}[\@ovyy][0pt]{#2}}}%
+}
+
+\lstdefinestyle{DTKlstBase}{%
+ basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily,
+ identifierstyle=\color{DTKlstIdentifiers},
+ keywordstyle=\color{DTKlstKeys},
+ stringstyle=\itshape\color{DTKlstStrings},
+ commentstyle=\itshape\color{DTKlstComments},
+ columns=fixed,
+ tabsize=2,
+ frame=single,
+ extendedchars=true,
+ showspaces=false,
+ showstringspaces=false,
+ breaklines=true,
+ breakindent=10pt,
+ backgroundcolor=\color{DTKlstBackground},
+ breakautoindent=true,
+ captionpos=t,
+ aboveskip=\medskipamount,
+ belowskip=\medskipamount,
+ xrightmargin=\fboxsep,
+ emphstyle=\DTK@lst@colorbox{lightgray},
+ prebreak=\mbox{$\hookleftarrow$},
+ literate={ä}{{\"a}}1 {ö}{{\"o}}1 {ü}{{\"u}}1
+ {Ä}{{\"A}}1 {Ö}{{\"O}}1 {Ü}{{\"U}}1 {ß}{\ss}1
+}
+
+\lstdefinestyle{DTKlstNumber}{%
+ style=DTKlstBase,
+ numbers=left,
+ numberstyle=\tiny\ttfamily,
+ numbersep=1em,
+ xleftmargin=1.5em,
+}
+
+\lstdefinestyle{DTKlstNoNumber}{%
+ style=DTKlstBase,
+ numbers=none,
+ xleftmargin=\fboxsep,
+}
+
+\lst@AddToHookExe{DeInit}{%
+ \@tempdima=\lst@belowskip \advance\@tempdima-.65\baselineskip
+ \edef\lst@belowskip{\the\@tempdima}%
+}
+
+\let\verbatim=\relax
+\lstnewenvironment{verbatim}
+{\lstset{language={},style=DTKlstNoNumber}}
+{}
+
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \belowcaptionskip=\abovecaptionskip
+}
+
+\lstset{style=DTKlstNoNumber}
+
+\endinput
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls
index 76785eb4a88..7034349d0f2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls
@@ -1,89 +1,36 @@
%%
%% This is file `dtk.cls',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% dtk.dtx (with options: `class')
-%%
-%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
-%%
-%% For the copyright see the source file.
-%%
-%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
-%% with new filenames distinct from dtk.cls.
-%%
-%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
-%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
-%%
-%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
-%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
-%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
-%% in the same archive or directory.)
-%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
-%%
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% Purpose:
-%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
-%%
-%% Documentation:
-%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
-%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
-%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
-%%
-%%
-%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
-%% Mainzer Str. 8
-%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
-%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
+%% LaTeX Class for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
%%
%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
-%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
+%% Copyright (C) 1997-2010 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
%%
-%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
-%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
-%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
-%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
-%% he says so in writing.
-%%
-%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
-%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
-%% modifications are indicated.
-%%
-%%
-%% This class is still under development and may be replaced with a
-%% new version which provides enhanced functionality.
-%%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2}
-\def\filename{dtk.dtx}
-\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $}
-\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $}
-\let\docversion=\fileversion
-\let\docdate=\filedate
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+\def\filename{dtk.cls}
+\def\fileversion{1.20}
+\def\filedate{2009/11/07}
+%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+\ProvidesClass{dtk}[\filedate~\fileversion
+ dtk document class (gn,rn,hv)]
+\let\DTKversion=\fileversion
+\let\DTKdate=\filedate
\newif\ifDTK@Author@
\DTK@Author@true
\newif\ifDTK@Draft@
+\newif\ifDTK@tgpagella@
+\newif\ifDTK@tgschola@
+\DTK@tgpagella@false
+\DTK@tgschola@false
\newif\ifDTK@lineno@
\DTK@lineno@false
\newif\ifDTK@german@
@@ -138,6 +85,8 @@
\DeclareOption{full}{\DTK@Author@false}
\DeclareOption{omitgerman}{\DTK@german@false}
\DeclareOption{ancient}{\def\DTK@layout{95}}
+\DeclareOption{tgpagella}{\DTK@tgpagella@true}
+\DeclareOption{tgschola}{\DTK@tgschola@true}
\DeclareOption{draft}{%
\DTK@Draft@true
\DTK@lineno@true
@@ -182,6 +131,7 @@
\DeclareOption{00}{\def\DTK@layout{00}}
\DeclareOption{01}{\def\DTK@layout{01}}
\DeclareOption{02}{\def\DTK@layout{02}}
+\DeclareOption{08}{\def\DTK@layout{08}}
\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}}
\else
\DeclareOption*{%
@@ -194,7 +144,7 @@
\LoadClass{book}
\ifDTK@lineno@
\RequirePackage{lineno}\linenumbers
- \RequirePackage{color}%
+ \RequirePackage{xcolor}%
\linenumbersep=.8ex
\def\linenumberfont{\normalfont\scriptsize\sffamily\bfseries}%
\definecolor{DTK@lineno@color}{cmyk}{0.26,0,0.76,0}% SpringGreen
@@ -206,16 +156,31 @@
\fi
%%%%%%%%%%
\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\RequirePackage{lmodern}}{}
-\RequirePackage[full]{textcomp}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+\ifDTK@tgpagella@
+ \RequirePackage{mathpazo,tgpagella}
+\else
+ \ifDTK@tgschola@
+ \usepackage[charter,expert]{mathdesign}
+ \def\rmdefault{bch} % not scaled
+ \else
+% \RequirePackage%[lucidascale]
+% {lucidabr}
+% \RequirePackage[scaled=1.0]{libertine}
+ \RequirePackage{lmodern}
+ \fi
\fi
+\RequirePackage[scaled=0.83]{luximono}
+\RequirePackage[full]{textcomp}
+\ifDTK@Author@\else\RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc}\fi
+\usepackage{fixltx2e}
\usepackage[hyphens]{url}
+\def\URL#1{\protect\url{#1}}
\usepackage[newcommands,newparameters]{ragged2e}
-\@ifundefined{flushleft}
- {\let\flushleft\FlushLeft\let\endflushleft\endFlushLeft}{}
\usepackage{filecontents}
+
+\RequirePackage{babel}
+\RequirePackage{tabularx}
+\iffalse
\ifDTK@german@
\RequirePackage{ngerman}
\selectlanguage{ngerman}
@@ -225,9 +190,11 @@
\typeout{*** Don't forget to use the macro \string\DTKgerman\space
afterwards.}
\fi
+\fi
+
\RequirePackage{multicol}
\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \RequirePackage{graphicx,color}
+ \RequirePackage{graphicx,xcolor}
\errorcontextlines=100\relax
\fi
\RequirePackage{dtklogos}
@@ -243,7 +210,7 @@
\fi}
\paperwidth = 148.5mm
\paperheight = 210mm
-\textheight = 471pt
+\textheight = 485pt %%%%471pt
\textwidth = 333pt
\oddsidemargin = 0pt
\evensidemargin = \oddsidemargin\oddsidemargin -35.89157pt
@@ -252,7 +219,7 @@
\headheight = 17pt
\headsep = 17pt
\footskip = 24pt
-\parskip = 0.5\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt
+\parskip = 0.3\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt
\parindent = 0pt
\renewcommand\topfraction{.9}
\renewcommand\bottomfraction{.9}
@@ -390,12 +357,6 @@
\providecommand\Macro[1]{\texttt{#1}}
\providecommand\Environment[1]{\texttt{#1}}
\providecommand\Email[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-%% hv 2006-08-11
-\providecommand*{\nolinkurl}{\url}
-\providecommand*{\href}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\CTANurl}[1]{%
- \href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1}}%
-}
\providecommand\Acronym[1]{\textsc{#1}}
\def\@listI{%
\leftmargin = \leftmargini
@@ -452,13 +413,13 @@
}
\newcommand\rolllabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \textbf{#1}\hfill}
\newenvironment{example}{\begin{quote}\small}{\end{quote}}
-\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname
- ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname
- the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \small
- \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
- \endgroup}
+%\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname
+% ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname
+% the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup
+% \@parboxrestore
+% \small
+% \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
+% \endgroup}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
\newif\ifFirstArticle
\FirstArticletrue
@@ -508,19 +469,13 @@
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
\markboth{#1}{#1}%
\FirstArticletrue
- \@startsection{chapter}{0}{\z@}{-1ex plus-1ex minus
- -.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\ChapterFont}*%
- }
-\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}}
-\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}}
-\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{%
- 0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}%
- {\parindent}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
+ \@startsection{chapter}{0}{\z@}{-1ex plus-1ex minus -.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\ChapterFont}*}
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.2ex plus .1ex}{\SectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{2pt plus .1ex}{\SubsectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.2ex plus.1ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
+\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
+%
\newcommand\keywords[1]{\def\DTK@keywords{#1}}
\def\DTK@keywords{}
\renewcommand\maketitle{%
@@ -711,12 +666,15 @@
\fi
\newcommand\CoverArt[3]{%
\ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
- \newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5}
+ \newfont\CoverTitleFont{
+% ecrm1700
+ lmr10 scaled \magstep 5}
\fi
\ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined
- \newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986}
+ \newfont\CoverNumberFont{%ecrm1700
+ lmr10 scaled 2986}
\fi
- \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill
+ \vspace*{-34pt}%\hfill
\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont
\journalname\hfill\null}%
\@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa
@@ -750,9 +708,7 @@
\newcommand\cover@sub[3]{%
#2. Jahrgang\quad Heft #1\quad #3%
}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \definecolor{CoverArt@grey}{gray}{.8}
-\fi
+\ifDTK@Author@\else\definecolor{CoverArt@grey}{gray}{.8}\fi
\def\CoverArt@strip@no#1/#2;{#1\raisebox{0.35ex}{\CoverTitleFont/}#2}
\newcommand\CoverArt@linewidth{0pt}%{1.2pt}
\newcommand\CoverArt@barwidth{2.41pt}
@@ -893,6 +849,7 @@
\parskip=\ContentsParSkip
\let\\=\relax
\TOC@configure
+ \raggedright%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% hv 2009-07-25
\@starttoc{toc}
\endgroup
}
@@ -1028,11 +985,7 @@
\g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook}
\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{\endinput}
\newcommand*\DTK@jobname{}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \edef\DTK@jobname{komoedie}
-\else
- \edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}
-\fi
+\ifDTK@Author@\edef\DTK@jobname{komoedie}\else\edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}\fi
\newcommand*\DTK@local@jobname{}
\newcommand*\DTK@local@inputname{}
%%%\newcommand*\DTK@PSforPDF{}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 9990c26e07d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1140 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `dtk.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% dtk.dtx (with options: `class')
-%%
-%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
-%%
-%% For the copyright see the source file.
-%%
-%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed
-%% with new filenames distinct from dtk.sty.
-%%
-%% For distribution of the original source see the terms
-%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx.
-%%
-%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the
-%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the
-%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be
-%% in the same archive or directory.)
-%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv"
-%%
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% Purpose:
-%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''.
-%%
-%% Documentation:
-%% The documentation can be generated from the original file
-%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to
-%% get the full documentation in DVI format.
-%%
-%%
-%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer
-%% Mainzer Str. 8
-%% 56321 Rhens (Germany)
-%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer
-%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige
-%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V.
-%%
-%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
-%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts
-%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for
-%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless
-%% he says so in writing.
-%%
-%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
-%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any
-%% modifications are indicated.
-%%
-%%
-%% This class is still under development and may be replaced with a
-%% new version which provides enhanced functionality.
-%%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2}
-\def\filename{dtk.dtx}
-\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $}
-\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $}
-\let\docversion=\fileversion
-\let\docdate=\filedate
-\newif\ifDTK@Author@
-\DTK@Author@true
-\newif\ifDTK@Draft@
-\newif\ifDTK@lineno@
-\DTK@lineno@false
-\newif\ifDTK@german@
-\DTK@german@true
-\ifx\documentclass\@undefined
- \newcommand\RequirePackage[1]{
- \chardef\DTK@cat=\the\catcode`\@
- \catcode`\@=11
- \input{#1.sty}%
- \catcode`\@=\DTK@cat}
- \let\LoadClass=\RequirePackage
- \newcommand\InputIfFileExists[3]{%
- \openin\DTK@file #1
- \ifeof\DTK@file\closein\DTK@file #3%
- \else\closein\DTK@file #2\input{#1}%
- \fi}
- \newcommand\DeclareOption{\@ifstar{\@gobble}{\DTK@DeclareOption}}
- \newcommand\DTK@DeclareOption[2]{\@namedef{ds@#1}{#2}}
- \let\ProcessOptions=\relax
- \let\OptionNotUsed=\gobble
- \def\ProvidesClass#1[#2]{\typeout{Document Style #1 #2}}
- \newcommand\emph[1]{{\em #1}\/}
- \newcommand\textbf[1]{{\bf #1}}
- \newcommand\textrm[1]{{\rm #1}}
- \newcommand\textsc[1]{{\sc #1}}
- \newcommand\textsf[1]{{\sf #1}}
- \newcommand\textsl[1]{{\sl #1\/}}
- \newcommand\textit[1]{{\it #1\/}}
- \newcommand\texttt[1]{{\tt #1}}
-
- \@ifundefined{fontshape}{\let\fontshape=\@gobble}{}
- \@ifundefined{selectfont}{\let\selectfont=\relax}{}
-
- \newcommand\providescommand[2]{\ifx#1\@undefined\newcommand#1{#2}\fi}
-\fi
-\newread\DTK@file
-\ProvidesClass{dtk}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene]
-\newcommand\DTK@isnum[1]{%
- \if!\ifnum9<1#1!\else_\fi
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi
-}
-\newcommand*\DTK@@thelinenumber{\thepage-\arabic{linenumber}}
-%%%%
-\DeclareOption{10pt}{\OptionNotUsed}
-\DeclareOption{11pt}{\OptionNotUsed}
-\DeclareOption{12pt}{\OptionNotUsed}
-\DeclareOption{twoside}{\OptionNotUsed}
-\DeclareOption{oneside}{\OptionNotUsed}
-\DeclareOption{full}{\DTK@Author@false}
-\DeclareOption{omitgerman}{\DTK@german@false}
-\DeclareOption{ancient}{\def\DTK@layout{95}}
-\DeclareOption{draft}{%
- \DTK@Draft@true
- \DTK@lineno@true
- \PassOptionsToPackage{pagewise}{lineno}%
- \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}%
-}
-\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{\DTK@lineno@true}
-\DeclareOption{nolinenumbers}{\DTK@lineno@false}
-\DeclareOption{pagewise}{%
- \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}}
-\DeclareOption{running}{%
- \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}}
-\DeclareOption{ln-long}{\def\DTK@@thelinenumber{%
- %\def\Hugo{%
- \ifoddNumberedPage% eigtl. Even!!!
- \ifodd\c@page
- \@tempswatrue %C
- \else
- \@tempswafalse %D
- \fi
- \else
- \ifodd\c@page
- \@tempswafalse %A
- \else
- \@tempswatrue %B
- \fi
- \fi
- %}\Hugo
- %\@tempcnta=\c@page
- %\if@tempswa \advance\@tempcnta\@ne \fi
- \if@tempswa \advance\c@page\@ne \fi
- %\edef\thepage{\the\@tempcnta}%
- \thepage-\arabic{linenumber}}}
-\DeclareOption{ln-short}{\def\DTK@@thelinenumber{%
- \arabic{linenumber}}}
-\iffalse% RN 2005-01-15
-\DeclareOption{95}{\def\DTK@layout{95}}
-\DeclareOption{96}{\def\DTK@layout{96}}
-\DeclareOption{97}{\def\DTK@layout{97}}
-\DeclareOption{98}{\def\DTK@layout{98}}
-\DeclareOption{99}{\def\DTK@layout{99}}
-\DeclareOption{00}{\def\DTK@layout{00}}
-\DeclareOption{01}{\def\DTK@layout{01}}
-\DeclareOption{02}{\def\DTK@layout{02}}
-\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}}
-\else
-\DeclareOption*{%
- \DTK@isnum{\CurrentOption}%
- {\edef\DTK@layout{\CurrentOption}}%
- {\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}}%
-}
-\fi
-\ProcessOptions
-\LoadClass{book}
-\ifDTK@lineno@
- \RequirePackage{lineno}\linenumbers
- \RequirePackage{color}%
- \linenumbersep=.8ex
- \def\linenumberfont{\normalfont\scriptsize\sffamily\bfseries}%
- \definecolor{DTK@lineno@color}{cmyk}{0.26,0,0.76,0}% SpringGreen
- \def\thelinenumber{%
- \begingroup
- \fboxsep=.3ex\fcolorbox{black}{DTK@lineno@color}{%
- \DTK@@thelinenumber}%
- \endgroup}%
-\fi
-%%%%%%%%%%
-\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\RequirePackage{lmodern}}{}
-\RequirePackage[full]{textcomp}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc}
-\fi
-\usepackage[hyphens]{url}
-\usepackage[newcommands,newparameters]{ragged2e}
-\@ifundefined{flushleft}
- {\let\flushleft\FlushLeft\let\endflushleft\endFlushLeft}{}
-\usepackage{filecontents}
-\ifDTK@german@
-\RequirePackage{ngerman}
-\selectlanguage{ngerman}
-\else
-\typeout{*** Warning: Loading of (n)german has been omitted. You have to
- load it manually.}
-\typeout{*** Don't forget to use the macro \string\DTKgerman\space
- afterwards.}
-\fi
-\RequirePackage{multicol}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \RequirePackage{graphicx,color}
- \errorcontextlines=100\relax
-\fi
-\RequirePackage{dtklogos}
-\newcommand\NeedPackage[1]{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@#1.sty\endcsname\relax
- \typeout{***}%
- \typeout{***}%
- \typeout{*** The required package `#1' seems not to be loaded.}%
- \typeout{*** I try to stumble along as good as I can.}%
- \typeout{*** Expect some undefined macros or other errors.}%
- \typeout{***}%
- \typeout{***}%
- \fi}
-\paperwidth = 148.5mm
-\paperheight = 210mm
-\textheight = 471pt
-\textwidth = 333pt
-\oddsidemargin = 0pt
-\evensidemargin = \oddsidemargin\oddsidemargin -35.89157pt
-\evensidemargin -17.70235pt
-\topmargin -55.66684pt
-\headheight = 17pt
-\headsep = 17pt
-\footskip = 24pt
-\parskip = 0.5\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt
-\parindent = 0pt
-\renewcommand\topfraction{.9}
-\renewcommand\bottomfraction{.9}
-\renewcommand\textfraction{.1}
-\columnsep = 5pt
-\emergencystretch = 1.5em
-\raggedbottom
-\clubpenalty = 10000
-\widowpenalty = 10000
-\marginparwidth=1cm
-\@ifdefinable\DTK@orig@marginpar{\let\DTK@orig@marginpar\marginpar}
-\renewcommand*\marginpar{%
- \ClassWarning{dtk}{Command `\string\marginpar' not expected}%
- \DTK@orig@marginpar}
-\newcommand\DTKgerman{
- \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman
- \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman
- \@ifundefined{l@ngerman}{}{\selectlanguage{ngerman}}%
-}
-\newcommand\DTK@captionsgerman{
- \DTK@captionsgerman
- \gdef\refname{Literatur}%
- \gdef\bibname{Literatur}%
- \gdef\contentsname{Inhalt Heft \Volume}%
-}
-\ifDTK@german@
- \DTKgerman
-\fi
-\newcommand\addressname{Autoren/Organisatoren}
-\newcommand\journalname{Die \TeX nische Kom{\"o}die}
-\newcommand\Volume{?/??}
-\newcommand\volume{\Volume\ --- Entwurf \today\
- \begingroup
- \count1=\time\divide\count1 60
- \count2=\count1 \multiply\count2 -60 \advance\count2\time
- \ifnum\count1<10 0\fi\the\count1:\ifnum\count2<10 0\fi\the\count2
- \endgroup
-}
-\newcommand*\DTK@corr@version{}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \newcommand*\DTK@today{}%
- \begingroup
- \count@\time
- \divide\count@ 60\relax
- \count2=-\count@
- \multiply\count2 60\relax
- \advance\count2 \time
- %% \loggingall %% Wuduh!
- \xdef\DTK@today{%
- \the\year-\two@digits{\the\month}-\two@digits{\the\day}% %!!! \the
- %\protect~% Warum geht das nicht?
- \noexpand\noexpand~%
- %% Wuduh! 2 \noexpand noetig? Weil \number\the 2mal zuschlaegt?
- %% Ohne \the langt 1 \noexpand!
- \two@digits{\the\count@}:\two@digits{\the\count2}}%
- %%\show\DTK@today
- \endgroup
- \ifDTK@Draft@
- \def\DTK@corr@version{\fbox{Korrekturversion:~\DTK@today}}%
- \AtEndOfClass{%
- \let\ps@empty=\ps@plain
- \let\ps@part=\ps@plain}%
- \else
- \let\@LN\@gobbletwo% Wegen .aux-Datei von vorherigem lineno-Lauf
- \let\@LN@col\@gobble
- \fi
-\fi
-\newcommand\footmark{\journalname\ \volume}
-\newcommand\ChapterFont{\Large\sf}
-\newcommand\SectionFont{\large\sf}
-\newcommand\SubsectionFont{\normalsize\sf}
-\newcommand\SubsubsectionFont{\normalsize\sf}
-\newcommand\AuthorFont{\large\sf}
-\newcommand\TitleFont{\Large\sf}
-\newcommand\HeadFont{\sf\fontshape{sl}\selectfont}
-\newcommand\FootFont{\footnotesize\sf\fontshape{sl}\selectfont}
-\newcommand\PagenoFont{\sf}
-\newcommand\NewpageThreshold{100pt}
-\newcommand\HeadRuleDepth{0pt}
-\newcommand\FootRuleDepth{0pt}
-\newcommand\ContentsParSkip{1pt}
-\newcommand\DTK@math{%
- \abovedisplayskip = 4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \belowdisplayskip = \abovedisplayskip
- \abovedisplayshortskip = 2pt plus 2pt
- \belowdisplayshortskip = \abovedisplayshortskip
-}
-\let\DTK@@normalsize=\@normalsize
-\def\@normalsize{%
- \DTK@@normalsize
- \DTK@math
- \let\@listi=\@listI}
-\let\DTK@normalsize=\normalsize
-\renewcommand\normalsize{%
- \DTK@normalsize
- \DTK@math
- \let\@listi=\@listI}
-\normalsize
-\let\DTK@small=\small
-\renewcommand\small{%
- \DTK@small
- \DTK@math
- \let\@listi=\@listI}
-\let\DTK@footnotesize=\footnotesize
-\renewcommand\footnotesize{%
- \DTK@footnotesize
- \DTK@math
- \let\@listi=\@listI}
-\begingroup
-\gdef\Path@SepI{/""}
-\gdef\Path@SepII{\symbol{92}""}
-\gdef\Path@SepIII{:""}
-\catcode`\/=13
-\catcode`\:=13
-\catcode`\^=0
-^catcode`\\=13
-^gdef^Path{^begingroup
- ^catcode`^/=13
- ^catcode`^\=13
- ^catcode`^:=13
- ^catcode`^~=12
- ^catcode`^$=12 %$
- ^catcode`^_=12
- ^catcode`^#=12
- ^let/=^Path@SepI
- ^let\=^Path@SepII
- ^let:=^Path@SepIII
- ^@Path}
-^gdef^@Path#1{^texttt{#1}^endgroup}
-^endgroup
-\providecommand\File[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\providecommand\Package[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\providecommand\Program[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\providecommand\Command[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\providecommand\Macro[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\providecommand\Environment[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\providecommand\Email[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-%% hv 2006-08-11
-\providecommand*{\nolinkurl}{\url}
-\providecommand*{\href}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\CTANurl}[1]{%
- \href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1}}%
-}
-\providecommand\Acronym[1]{\textsc{#1}}
-\def\@listI{%
- \leftmargin = \leftmargini
- \parsep = \parskip
- \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt}
-\let\@listi=\@listI
-\def\@listii{%
- \leftmargin = \leftmarginii
- \labelwidth = \leftmarginii
- \advance \labelwidth by-\labelsep
- \parsep = \parskip
- \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt}
-\def\@listiii{%
- \leftmargin = \leftmarginiii
- \labelwidth = \leftmarginiii
- \advance \labelwidth by-\labelsep
- \partopsep = 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt
- \parsep = \parskip
- \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt}
-\@listi
-\renewcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\circ$}
-\renewcommand\labelitemii{$\m@th\triangleright$}
-\renewcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\diamond$}
-\setlength\leftmargini{1.5em}
-\setlength\leftmarginii{1.4em}
-\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.3em}
-\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.2em}
-\renewenvironment{description}{%
- \begin{list}{}{%
- \labelwidth = 0pt
- \itemindent = -\leftmargin
- \parsep = \parskip
- \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt
- \let\makelabel=\descriptionlabel}%
- }{\end{list}}
-\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{%
- \hspace\labelsep{\normalsize\it #1}}
-\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
- \list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}%
- \item\relax
-}{\endlist}
-\newenvironment{roll}%
- {\@ifnextchar[{\r@ll}{\r@ll[0pt]}}%
- {\end{list}}
-\def\r@ll[#1]{\begin{list}{}{%
- \labelwidth = #1
- \leftmargin = \labelwidth
- \itemsep = .3ex
- \let\makelabel=\rolllabel}%
- }
-\newcommand\rolllabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \textbf{#1}\hfill}
-\newenvironment{example}{\begin{quote}\small}{\end{quote}}
-\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname
- ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname
- the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \small
- \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
- \endgroup}
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
-\newif\ifFirstArticle
-\FirstArticletrue
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \renewcommand\part{%
- \typeout{*** Parts can not be used in single articles.}}
-\else
- \renewcommand\part{%
- \clearpage
- \thispagestyle{part}%
- \FirstArticletrue
- \Advance@Label@Prefix
- \@ifstar{\part@star{chapter}}{\part@star{part}}}
-\fi
-\newcommand\part@star[1]{%
- \@ifnextchar[{\part@optional{#1}}{\part@normal{#1}}}
-\def\part@optional#1[#2]#3{%
- \markboth{#2}{#2}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{#2}%
- \@ifnextchar[{\part@subtitle{#3}}{\part@nosubtitle{#3}}}
-\newcommand\part@normal[2]{%
- \markboth{#2}{#2}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{#2}%
- \@ifnextchar[{\part@subtitle{#2}}{\part@nosubtitle{#2}}}
-\def\part@subtitle#1[#2]{\TopArt{#1}{\\#2}\bigskip\par}
-\newcommand\part@nosubtitle[1]{\TopArt{#1}{}\bigskip\par}
-\newcommand\TopArtRule{2pt}
-\newcommand\TopArt[2]{%
- \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\parskip=0pt\parindent=0pt
- \null\vspace{18pt}\par\raggedright\large\sf
- {\huge\sf #1}\\[-.5ex]\rule{\textwidth}{\TopArtRule}%
- \vspace{2pt} #2
- \end{minipage}}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \renewcommand\chapter{%
- \typeout{*** Chapters can not be used in single articles.}}
-\else
- \renewcommand\chapter{%
- \@ifnextchar*{\chapter@star}{%
- \@ifnextchar[{\chapter@optional}{\chapter@normal}}}
-\fi
-\def\chapter@star*{\chapter}
-\def\chapter@normal#1{\chapter@optional[#1]{#1}}
-\def\chapter@optional[#1]{%
- \typeout{#1}%
- \Advance@Label@Prefix
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \markboth{#1}{#1}%
- \FirstArticletrue
- \@startsection{chapter}{0}{\z@}{-1ex plus-1ex minus
- -.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\ChapterFont}*%
- }
-\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}}
-\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}}
-\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{%
- -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{%
- 0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}%
- {\parindent}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}}
-\newcommand\keywords[1]{\def\DTK@keywords{#1}}
-\def\DTK@keywords{}
-\renewcommand\maketitle{%
- \ifDTK@Author@ \thispagestyle{part}\fi
- \ifdim\DTKtitle@skip>0pt\vspace{\DTKtitle@skip}\fi
- \begingroup
- \dimen0=\vsize
- \advance\dimen0 by -\pagetotal
- \ifdim\dimen0<\NewpageThreshold
- \newpage
- \global\FirstArticletrue
- \fi
- \endgroup
- \Advance@Label@Prefix
- \begingroup
- \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
- \ifFirstArticle
- \global\FirstArticlefalse
- \vskip 3pt
- \else
- \DTKtitle@sep
- \fi
- \setcounter{footnote}0
- \@flushglue=0pt plus .3\textwidth\relax
- \raggedright
- \TitleFont
- \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font\relax
- \xspaceskip=\fontdimen7\font\relax
- \@title
- \ifx\@author\@empty\else
- \bigskip\par
- \AuthorFont\@author
- \fi
- \end{minipage}%
- \@thanks
- \let\thanks\@gobble
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@title}%
- \markboth{\@title}{\@title}%
- \endgroup
- \let\@title=\@empty
- \let\@author=\@empty
- \let\@thanks=\@empty
- \setcounter{figure}0
- \setcounter{table}0
- \setcounter{equation}0
- \medskip\par}
-\newcommand\DTKtitle@skip{12pt}
-\newcommand\DTKtitle@sep{\vspace{32pt plus 8pt minus 16pt}}
-\renewcommand\and{, }
-\let\@title=\@empty
-\let\@author=\@empty
-\let\@thanks=\@empty
-\newenvironment{abstract}{%
- \begin{quote}\small
- }{%
- \end{quote}\medskip\par}
-\renewcommand\thefigure{\arabic{figure}}
-\renewcommand\thetable{\arabic{table}}
-\renewcommand\theequation{\arabic{equation}}
-\newcount\DTL@label
-\DTL@label=0
-\newcommand\Advance@Label@Prefix{%
- \advance\DTL@label 1
- \xdef\Label@Prefix{module \the\DTL@label:}}
-\Advance@Label@Prefix
-\let\Ref=\ref
-\let\Label=\label
-\let\Pageref=\pageref
-\renewcommand\ref[1]{\Ref{\Label@Prefix:#1}}
-\renewcommand\label[1]{\Label{\Label@Prefix:#1}}
-\renewcommand\pageref[1]{\Pageref{\Label@Prefix:#1}}
-\renewcommand\thebibliography[1]{%
- \section*{\refname}%
- \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{%
- \settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%
- \leftmargin\labelwidth
- \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
- \usecounter{enumi}}
- \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}
- \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax\DTK@bibliography@rightskip}
-\newcommand\DTK@bibliography@rightskip{\rightskip=0pt plus 2em}
-\newcommand\DTK@bibliography[1]{
- \InputIfFileExists{#1.bbl}{}{\typeout{--- File #1.bbl not found.}}}
-\bibliographystyle{dtk}
-\newcommand\DTK@fnrightmargin{0em}
-\newcommand\DTK@fnleftmargin{1em}
-\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
- \@nobreaktrue
- \begin{list}{}{%
- \rightmargin=0pt%
- \parsep=0.333\baselineskip plus 2pt
- \leftmargin=\DTK@fnleftmargin}
- \item\mbox{}%
- \llap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}\kern1pt}%
- #1%
- \end{list}}
-\@ifundefined{@textsuperscript}{%
- \def\@textsuperscript#1{%
- {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}}
-}{}
-\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
- \kern-3\p@
- \hrule\@width0.333\columnwidth
- \kern2.6\p@}
-\renewcommand\ps@plain{%
- \let\@mkboth=\@gobbletwo
- \let\chaptermark=\@gobble
- \let\sectionmark=\@gobble
- \let\subsectionmark=\@gobble
- \def\@oddhead{\vbox{\hbox to \textwidth{%
- \let\\=\relax
- \HeadFont \rightmark \hfil\PagenoFont\thepage}\kern 3pt
- \ifdim\HeadRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\HeadRuleDepth\fi}}%
- \def\@evenhead{\vbox{\hbox to \textwidth{%
- \let\\=\relax
- \PagenoFont \thepage\hfil\HeadFont \leftmark}\kern 3pt
- \ifdim\HeadRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\HeadRuleDepth\fi}}%
-\iffalse% RN 2005-01-17
- \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\FootFont \footmark\hfil\null}}}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\null\hfil\FootFont \footmark}}}%
-\else
- \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{%
- \FootFont \footmark\hfil\DTK@corr@version\null}}}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{%
- \null\FootFont\DTK@corr@version\hfil \footmark}}}%
-\fi
-}
-\let\ps@headings\ps@plain
-\newcommand\ps@part{%
- \let\@mkboth=\@gobbletwo
- \let\chaptermark=\@gobble
- \let\sectionmark=\@gobble
- \let\subsectionmark=\@gobble
- \let\@oddhead=\@empty
- \let\@evenhead=\@empty
-\iffalse% RN 2005-01-17
- \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\FootFont \footmark\hfil\null}}}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\null\hfil\FootFont \footmark}}}%
-\else
- \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{%
- \FootFont \footmark\hfil\DTK@corr@version\null}}}%
- \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{%
- \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi
- \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{%
- \null\FootFont \DTK@corr@version\hfil\footmark}}}%
-\fi
-}
-\pagestyle{plain}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \AtEndOfClass{%\show\DTK@jobname
- \InputIfFileExists{\DTK@jobname.inf}{%
- \renewcommand\volume{\Volume}}{}}%
-\else
- \newcommand\DieTeXnischeKomoedie[3]{%
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- \gdef\Volume{#1}%
- \xdef\volume{\Volume}%???
- \gdef\DTKedition{#2}%
- \gdef\DTKdate{#3}%
- \immediate\openout\@unused \jobname.inf\relax
- \immediate\write\@unused{%
- \string\gdef\string\Volume{#1}^^J%
- \string\gdef\string\DTKedition{#2}^^J%
- \string\gdef\string\DTKdate{#3}%
- }%
- \immediate\closeout\@unused
- \iffalse% RN 2005-02-20; unnoetig, da localer \jobname usw.
- \global\let\bibliography=\DTK@bibliography
- \global\let\bibliographystyle=\@gobble
- \fi
- \CoverArt{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \newpage}
-\fi
-\newcommand\CoverArt[3]{%
- \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined
- \newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5}
- \fi
- \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined
- \newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986}
- \fi
- \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill
- \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont
- \journalname\hfill\null}%
- \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa
- \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa
- \hbox to\@tempdimb{%
- \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{%
- \vskip\wd\@tempboxa
- \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \ %
- \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight}
- \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright
- \rule{1em}{0pt}%
- \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em
- \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font
- DANTE\\
- Deutschsprachige\\
- Anwendervereinigung
- \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex]
- \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap
- \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}%
- \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}%
- {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
- \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}%
- \CoverNumberFont
- \null\hfill
- \makebox(0,0)[br]{%
- \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{%
- \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}%
- }}%
- \end{minipage}%
-}
-\newcommand\cover@sub[3]{%
- #2. Jahrgang\quad Heft #1\quad #3%
-}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
- \definecolor{CoverArt@grey}{gray}{.8}
-\fi
-\def\CoverArt@strip@no#1/#2;{#1\raisebox{0.35ex}{\CoverTitleFont/}#2}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@linewidth{0pt}%{1.2pt}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@barwidth{2.41pt}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@font{\Large\raggedleft}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@small{\footnotesize}
-\newcommand\CoverArt@gap{2em}
-\chardef\DTK@cat=\the\catcode`\"
-\catcode`\"=13
-\newcommand\address[3]{%
- \begingroup
- \def\"##1{\@ifundefined{detex@@##1}{##1}%
- {\csname detex@@##1\endcsname}}%
- \ifcat a\noexpand"\else\let"=\"\fi
- \def\ss{ss}%
- \let\'=\relax
- \let\`=\relax
- \let\^=\relax
- \let\.=\relax
- \let\==\relax
- \let\d=\relax
- \let\b=\relax
- \let\c=\relax
- \let\v=\relax
- \let\H=\relax
- \let\t=\relax
- \let\u=\relax
- \let\~=\relax
- \def\o{o}%
- \def\O{O}%
- \def\aa{aa}%
- \def\AA{Aa}%
- \def\l{l}%
- \def\L{L}%
- \def\ae{ae}%
- \def\AE{Ae}%
- \def\oe{oe}%
- \def\OE{Oe}%
- \def\TeX{TeX}%
- \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
- \def\LaTeXe{LaTeX2e}%
- \let\null=\relax
- \xdef\@ddress{#2, #1}%
- \endgroup
- \begingroup
- \def\\{\string\\}%
- \ifcat a\noexpand"\else\def\"{\string"}\fi
- \def"{\string"}%
- \def\null{}%
- \expandafter\@strip\@ddress$%$
- \iffalse% RN 2005-01-15
- \index{\STRIP@*#1 #2!#3}%
- \else
- \glossary{\STRIP@*#1 #2!#3}%
- \fi
- \endgroup
-}
-\catcode`\"=\DTK@cat
-\let\strip@grp={
-\let\strip@end=$%$
-\def\@strip{\def\STRIP@{}\strip@I}
-\def\strip@I{\let\strip@next=\strip@I
- \futurelet\strip@CHAR\strip@II}
-\def\strip@II#1{%
- \ifx\strip@CHAR\strip@end
- \let\strip@next=\relax
- \else\ifx\strip@CHAR\strip@grp
- \strip@I #1$%$
- \let\strip@next=\strip@I
- \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR A
- \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@#1}%
- \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR.
- \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@#1}%
- \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR\space
- \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@ #1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \strip@next}
-\def\detex@@a{ae}
-\def\detex@@o{oe}
-\def\detex@@u{ue}
-\def\detex@@A{Ae}
-\def\detex@@O{Oe}
-\def\detex@@U{Ue}
-\def\detex@@s{ss}
-\ifDTK@Author@\else
-\newenvironment{theaddresses}{%
- \chapter{\addressname}\Label{addresses}
- \begingroup
- \columnsep=10pt
- \addresssize
- \def\addressitem##1##2##3{%
- \par
- \parbox{\columnwidth}{
- \textbf{##1}\hfill[\ignorespaces ##3]%
- \\ ##2}}
- \begin{multicols}{2}%
- \raggedbottom
- \raggedright
-}{%
- \end{multicols}%
- \endgroup
- }
-\fi
-\newcommand\addresssize{\footnotesize\parskip=6pt plus 2pt minus 3pt}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \newcommand\listofaddresses{%
- \typeout{*** listofaddresses not supported in articles.}}
- \let\makeaddresses\relax% RN 2005-01-15
-\else
- \iffalse% RN 2005-01-15
- \newcommand\listofaddresses{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.ind}{}{%
- \typeout{No file \jobname.ind.}%
- \typeout{Use the following command to create it:\space\space
- makeindex -s dtk.ist \jobname}%
- \typeout{\space}}%
- }
- \else
- \newcommand\listofaddresses{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.gls}{}{%
- \typeout{No file \jobname.gls.}%
- \typeout{Use the following command to create it:^^J%
- \@spaces makeindex -s dtk.ist -o \jobname.gls \jobname.glo}%
- \typeout{\space}}%
- }
- \let\makeaddresses\makeglossary
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
- \typeout{*** tabelofcontents not supported in articles.}}
-\else
- \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
- \clearpage
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- \markboth{\contentsname}{\contentsname}%
- \ContentsArt
- \begingroup
- \parskip=\ContentsParSkip
- \let\\=\relax
- \TOC@configure
- \@starttoc{toc}
- \endgroup
- }
-\fi
-\let\TOC@configure\relax
-\newcommand\ContentsArt{%
- \vspace*{-\headheight}\vspace*{-\headsep}\vspace*{-2pt}
- \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
- \Huge \journalname\\[2pt]%
- \rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\\[2pt]%
- \null\hfill
- \CoverArt@small
- \cover@sub{\volume}{\DTKedition}{\DTKdate}
- \end{minipage}\vspace{16pt minus 8pt}\par
-}
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bdx}{n}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>
- <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88> ecrb10
- }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bdx}{n}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>
- <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88> cmbdx10
- }{}
-\setcounter{tocdepth}{0}
-\renewcommand\l@part[2]{%
- \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
- \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line
- \@tempdima 1.5em
- \begingroup
- \bf
- \advance\leftskip\@tempdima
- \hskip -\leftskip
- #1\par
- \penalty\@highpenalty
- \endgroup
- \addvspace{0.2em}%
-}
-\renewcommand\l@chapter[2]{%
- \begingroup
- \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
- \@afterindenttrue
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \@tempdima 1.5em\relax % number width
- \@tempdimb 2.5em\relax % indent
- \advance\leftskip \@tempdimb
- \advance\rightskip \@tempdimb
- \noindent\hskip -\leftskip
- \hbox to\@tempdimb{#2\hss}%
- #1\par
- \endgroup}
-\iffalse% RN 2005-01-15
-\@ifundefined{DTK@layout}{}{\input dtk\DTK@layout.clo}
-\else
-\@ifundefined{DTK@layout}{}{\input{dtk\DTK@layout.clo}}
-\fi
-\IfFileExists{eurosans.sty}
-{%
- \RequirePackage{eurosans}
- %%%\AtBeginDocument{\let\texteuro\euro}
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteuro}{\euro}}% ???
-}
-{%
- % Das kann jeder.
- \let\DTK@texteuro\texteuro
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \renewcommand*\texteuro{\textsf{\DTK@texteuro}}}
-}
-\begingroup
- \chardef\x=0 %
- % check pdfTeX
- \@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{}{%
- \ifcase\pdfoutput
- \else
- \chardef\x=1 %
- \fi
- }%
- % check VTeX
- \@ifundefined{OpMode}{}{%
- \chardef\x=2 %
- }%
-\expandafter\endgroup
-\ifcase\x
- % default case
- \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\the\paperwidth,\the\paperheight}}%
-\or
- % pdfTeX is running in pdf mode
- \pdfpagewidth\paperwidth\pdfpageheight\paperheight
-\else
- % VTeX is running
- \mediawidth\paperwidth\mediaheight\paperheight
-\fi
-
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \begingroup% vielleicht noch intelligenter...
- \ttfamily
- \@tempdima\fontdimen3\font
- \advance\@tempdima\fontdimen4\font
- \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@
- \edef\@tempa{\ttdefault}\gdef\ttdefault{cmtt}%
- \ClassWarning{dtk}{%
- Font `\@tempa' is bad, changed to '\ttdefault'}%
- \fi
- \endgroup
-}
-\RequirePackage{makeidx}
-\renewenvironment{theindex}
- {\begin{multicols}{2}[\section{\indexname}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}]%
- \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
- \columnseprule \z@
- \columnsep=10pt
- \raggedbottom\raggedright
- \let\item\@idxitem}
- {\end{multicols}}
-\renewcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
-\renewcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}}
-\renewcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}}
-\renewcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus1\p@\relax}
-
-\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook{}
-\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedDocumentclass{%
- \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook}
-\AtEmbeddedDocumentclass{%
-%%% \filename@parse{\protect#1}\edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}%???
- \edef\jobname{\DTK@local@jobname}%
-}
-\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook{}
-\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedBeginDocument{%
- \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook}
-\AtEmbeddedBeginDocument{}
-\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook{}
-\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{%
- \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook}
-\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{\endinput}
-\newcommand*\DTK@jobname{}
-\ifDTK@Author@
- \edef\DTK@jobname{komoedie}
-\else
- \edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}
-\fi
-\newcommand*\DTK@local@jobname{}
-\newcommand*\DTK@local@inputname{}
-%%%\newcommand*\DTK@PSforPDF{}
-\newcommand*\DTK@eat@version[1][]{\ignorespaces}
-\newcommand*\DTK@usepackage{}
-\newcommand*\DTKinput[1]{%
- \begingroup
- \filename@parse{#1}%
- \edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}%
- \@ifundefined{filename@ext}%
- {\IfFileExists{\DTK@local@jobname.ltx}%
- {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{\DTK@local@jobname.ltx}}%
- {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{\DTK@local@jobname.tex}}%
- }%
- {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{#1}}%
- \renewcommand*\documentclass[2][]{%
- %%\edef\jobname{\DTK@local@jobname}%
- %%%\let\DTK@PSforPDF\PSforPDF
- %\renewcommand\PSforPDF[2][]{}%
- %%%\let\PSforPDF\@gobble
- \DTK@embedded@documentclasshook
- \DTK@eat@version}%
- \renewcommand*\usepackage[2][]{%
- \@ifnextchar[%]
- {\DTK@usepackage{##1}{##2}}%
- {\DTK@usepackage{##1}{##2}[]}%
- }%
- \def\DTK@usepackage##1##2[##3]{%
- \edef\@tempb{\zap@space##2 \@empty}%
- \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{\def\@tempb{inputenc}%
- \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
- \edef\@tempa{##1}%
- \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\inputencoding{##1}\fi
- \else
- \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\NeedPackage{\@tempa}%
- \RecordPackage{##1}\@tempa{##3}\DTK@local@inputname
- \fi
- \fi}}%
- \let\pagestyle\@gobble
- \let\thispagestyle\@gobble
- \let\nocite\@gobble
- \let\listfiles\relax
- \let\nofiles\relax
- \renewcommand*\AtBeginDocument[1]{%
- \typeout{\string\AtBeginDocument\space ignored!}}
- \renewcommand*\AtEndDocument[1]{%
- \typeout{\string\AtEndDocument\space ignored!}}
- \renewenvironment*{document}%
- %%%{\let\PSforPDF\DTK@PSforPDF}%
- %%%{\endinput}%
- {\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook}%
- {\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook}%
- \input{\DTK@local@inputname}%
- \endgroup
-}
-%%%\RequirePackage[final]{ps4pdf}
-\@ifdefinable\User@Packages{\newwrite\User@Packages}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- %%%\edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}%
- %%%\edef\PfP@container{\DTK@jobname-pics.pdf}%
- \ifDTK@Author@\else
- \listfiles
- \InputIfFileExists{userpackages.tex}%
- {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
- * File `userpackages.tex' used.^^J%
- *************************************}%
- \newcommand*\RecordPackage[4]{}%
- % warum gibt es kein \@gobblethree? ist jetzt egal!
- }%
- {%
- \immediate\openout\User@Packages userpackages.tex\relax
- \begingroup \catcode`\~=\active \let~=\space
- \immediate\write\User@Packages{%
- \@percentchar\space userpackages.tex^^J%
- \@percentchar\space generated by `\jobname'^^J%
- \@percentchar\space \DTK@today}%
- \endgroup
- \AtEndDocument{%
- \immediate\closeout\User@Packages\relax}%
- \newcommand*\RecordPackage[4]{%
- \immediate\write\User@Packages{%
- \string\usepackage[##1]{##2}[##3] %
- \@percentchar\space From file: ##4}}%
- }%
- \fi
- % RN 2005-03-21
- \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{%
- \ifDTK@Draft@\else
- \nolinenumbers
- \fi
- }{}
-}
-\def\indexname{Stichwortverzeichnis}% Besser woanders?
-\def\printindex{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\DTK@jobname.ind}{}{%
- \typeout{No file \DTK@jobname.ind.}%
- \typeout{Use the following command to create it:^^J%
- \@spaces makeindex -s dtk-idx.ist -o \DTK@jobname.ind \DTK@jobname.idx}%
- \typeout{\space}}%
-}
-\@fptop\z@
-
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `dtk.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk10.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk10.clo
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..67d18dd570e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk10.clo
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+\ProvidesFile{dtk10.clo}
+ [2009/11/01 v0.1a dtk class option (RN)]
+
+\input{dtk.clo}
+
+\IfFileExists{paralist.sty}{%
+\RequirePackage[neverdecrease]{paralist}
+ \let\itemize\compactitem
+ \let\enditemize\endcompactitem
+ \let\enumerate\compactenum
+ \let\endenumerate\endcompactenum
+ \let\description\compactdesc
+ \let\enddescription\endcompactdesc
+}{}
+
+\endinput
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty
index 3a43f41a075..8b36218254f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty
@@ -77,8 +77,8 @@
%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2}
\def\filename{dtk.dtx}
-\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $}
-\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $}
+\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.9a $}
+\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2005/10/29 18:17:42 $}
\let\docversion=\fileversion
\let\docdate=\filedate
\ProvidesPackage{dtklogos}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene]
@@ -122,13 +122,41 @@
\fi
\newcommand{\logo@smaller}{\protect\logo@sm@ller}
\fi
-\renewcommand\TeX{T\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX%
- \spacefactor1000 }
+
+% Tip aus OS X TeX von Peter Dyballa vom 25.9.08 fuer die
+% Befehle \XeTeX und \XeLaTeX; das Paket xltxtra fuehrt
+% bei mir irgendwie zu Fehlermeldungen...
+\providecommand*\TeX@logo@spacing[6]{%
+ \def\xxt@kern@Te{#1}%
+ \def\xxt@kern@eX{#2}%
+ \def\xxt@lower@e{#3}%
+ \def\xxt@kern@La{#4}%
+ \def\xxt@kern@aT{#5}%
+ \def\xxt@kern@eL{#6}%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\XeTeX{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \smash{%
+ X\lower\xxt@lower@e
+ \hbox{\kern\xxt@kern@eX
+ \setbox0=\hbox{E}\dimen0=\ht0\advance\dimen0by\dp0%
+ \reflectbox{E}%
+ }\kern\xxt@kern@Te\TeX}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\XeLaTeX{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \smash{%
+ X\lower\xxt@lower@e
+ \hbox{\kern\xxt@kern@eX
+ \setbox0=\hbox{E}\dimen0=\ht0\advance\dimen0by\dp0\relax
+ \reflectbox{E}%
+ }\kern\xxt@kern@eL\LaTeX}}
+\TeX@logo@spacing{-0.15em}{-0.125em}{0.5ex}{-0.36em}{-0.12em}{-0.13em}
+%\providecommand{\XeTeX}{X\kern-.1em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.15em\TeX}
+%\providecommand{\XeLaTeX}{X\kern-.1em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.15em\LaTeX}
\providecommand\AmS{%
\(\cal A\)\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox
{\(\cal M\)}\kern-.125em{\(\cal S\)}}
\providecommand\AMS{\AmS}
-\providecommand{\XeTeX}{X\kern-.1em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.15em\TeX}
\providecommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX}
\providecommand\AMSLaTeX{\AmSLaTeX}
\providecommand\AmSTeX{%
@@ -159,6 +187,7 @@
\kern-.125em {\the\textfont2 S}-\TeX}
\providecommand\LamSTeX{\LAMSTeX}
\providecommand\LAmSTeX{\LAMSTeX}
+\providecommand\La{L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}}
\providecommand\LaTeX{%
L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}\kern-.15em\TeX}
\providecommand\LATEX{\LaTeX}
@@ -243,12 +272,12 @@
\providecommand\WinEdtKK{\mbox{\textsf{WinEdt2k}}}%
\providecommand{\LyX}{L\kern-.1667em\lower.25em\hbox{Y}\kern-.125emX\@}
\providecommand*{\exTeX}{%
- \textrm{% das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet
+ \textrm{% das Logo grunds^^e4tzlich serifenbehaftet
\ensuremath{\textstyle\varepsilon_{\kern-0.15em\mathcal{X}}}%
\kern-.15em\TeX
}%
}
- \providecommand\eV{e.V\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}}
+\providecommand\eV{e.V\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}}
\providecommand\dante{DANTE \eV}
\providecommand\Dante{DANTE,
Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX~\eV}
@@ -267,7 +296,7 @@
\hbox{$\cal N\kern-0.35em\lower0.5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\kern-0.2emS$}}
\providecommand\eTeX{{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\TeX}}
\providecommand*{\ExTeX}{% RN 2005-01-15
- \textrm{% das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet
+ \textrm{% das Logo grunds^^e4tzlich serifenbehaftet
\ensuremath{\textstyle\varepsilon_{\kern-0.15em\mathcal{X}}}%
\kern-.15em\TeX
}%
@@ -283,9 +312,34 @@
{\providecommand*\DANTE[1][]{DANTE}}
\providecommand*\ConTeXt{Con\TeX t}
\providecommand*\conTeXt{con\TeX t}
-\providecommand\Thanh{H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{\relax}}} Th\`anh}
\providecommand*\MiKTeX{MiK\TeX}
\providecommand*\MikTeX\MiKTeX
+%
+\providecommand\ThanhVN{H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}}
+\providecommand\ThanhNN{Th\`anh}
+\providecommand\Thanh{H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{\relax}}} Th\`anh}
+
+\TeX@logo@spacing{-0.15em}{-0.15em}{0.5ex}{-0.36em}{-0.15em}{-0.1em}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\XeTeX{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \smash{%
+ X\lower\xxt@lower@e
+ \hbox{\kern\xxt@kern@eX
+ \setbox0=\hbox{E}\dimen0=\ht0\advance\dimen0by\dp0%
+ \raise\dimen0\hbox{\rotatebox{180}{\box0}}%
+ }\kern\xxt@kern@Te\TeX}}%
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\XeLaTeX{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \smash{%
+ X\lower\xxt@lower@e
+ \hbox{\kern\xxt@kern@eX
+ \setbox0=\hbox{E}\dimen0=\ht0\advance\dimen0by\dp0\relax
+ \raise\dimen0\hbox{\rotatebox{180}{\box0}}%
+ }\kern\xxt@kern@eL\LaTeX}}
+%
+%
\endinput
%%
%% End of file `dtklogos.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
index 3a3cab4e21f..0f8bf9069be 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ my @TLP_working = qw(
dnaseq doc-pictex docmfp docmute doi doipubmed
dot2texi dotarrow dotseqn dottex
doublestroke dox dozenal dpfloat dprogress drac draftcopy
- draftwatermark dramatist dratex drv dtxgallery
+ draftwatermark dramatist dratex drv dtk dtxgallery
dtxtut duerer-latex duotenzor dvdcoll dviasm dviincl dvipdfmx-def
dvipsconfig dyntree
ean13isbn easy easylist
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
index 0451342e778..05ddb2367c7 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ $Master = "$mydir/../..";
'dps', "die 'skipping, requires acrotex'",
'draftmark', "die 'skipping, nosell license'",
'dropping', "die 'skipping, nosell license'",
- 'dtk', "&MAKEflatten",
+# 'dtk', "&MAKEflatten",
'dtxtut', "&setup", # straight copy
'easy', "&MAKEeasy",
'easylatex', "die 'skipping, complicated perl modules, sorry'",